GRD130D 6F2S0904 1.2

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY
GRD130 - xxxD
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 1.2 )
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRD130. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
DANGER
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Fiber optic
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
CAUTION
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
 Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to
the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

 DC power
If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power.
This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 2 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Short-link
Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before
shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to
reduce.
 Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing
of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If
any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
 Plastics material
This product contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins
 3 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 8
2. Application Notes 10
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 10
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 10
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 14
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 18
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 21
2.2 Frequency Protection 24
2.2.1 Frequency element 24
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 26
2.2.3 Trip Circuit 27
2.3 Synchronism Check function 28
Setting 33
2.4 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 34
3. Technical Description 36
3.1 Hardware Description 36
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 36
3.2 Input and Output Signals 40
3.2.1 AC Input Signals 40
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 40
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 41
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 43
3.3 Automatic Supervision 44
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 44
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 44
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 45
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 45
3.3.4 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring 46
3.3.5 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring 46
3.3.6 Failure Alarms 46
3.3.7 Trip Blocking 47
3.3.9 Setting 48
3.4 Recording Function 49
3.4.1 Fault Recording 49
3.4.2 Event Recording 50
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 50
3.5 Metering Function 52
4. User Interface 53
4.1 Outline of User Interface 53
 4 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.1.1 Front Panel 53

4.1.2 Communication Ports 55
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 56
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 56
4.2.2 Relay Menu 59
4.2.3 Displaying Records 62
4.2.4 Displaying the Status 66
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 71
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 72
4.2.7 Testing 100
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 102
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 102
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 103
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 103
4.7 Clock Function 104
5. Installation 105
5.1 Receipt of Relays 105
5.2 Relay Mounting 105
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 105
5.4 Handling Precautions 105
5.5 External Connections 106
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 107
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 107
6.2 Cautions 108
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 108
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 108
6.3 Preparations 109
6.4 Hardware Tests 110
6.4.1 User Interfaces 110
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 110
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 111
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 112
6.5 Function Test 114
6.5.1 Measuring Element 114
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 120
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 120
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 121
6.6.1 On Load Test 121
6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test 121
6.7 Maintenance 123
6.7.1 Regular Testing 123
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 123
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 124
 5 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 125

6.7.5 Storage 125
7. Putting Relay into Service 126
 6 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix A Signal List 127

Appendix B Event Record Items 169
Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List 173
Appendix D Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 175
Appendix E Case Outline 187
Appendix F Typical External Connection 189
Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet 197
Appendix H Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 227
Appendix I Return Repair Form 231
Appendix J Technical Data 237
Appendix K Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 243
Appendix L IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 247
Appendix M IEC61850: MICS & PICS 259
Appendix N Ordering 293
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.1.1)
 7 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
1. Introduction
GRD130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution
substations, generators, motors and transformers.
The GRD130 series has two models and provides the following protection schemes in both
models.
 Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics
 Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection
 Over- and under-frequency protection
 Frequency rate-of-change protection
The GRD130 series provides the following protection schemes depending on the models.
 Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
 Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection
The GRD130 series provides the following functions for all models.
 Eight settings groups
 Configurable binary inputs and outputs
 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
 Trip circuit supervision
 Automatic self-supervision
 Synchronizm check function
 Menu-based HMI system
 Configurable LED indication
 Metering and recording functions
 Rear mounted serial communication interface RS485 or fibre optic port for RSM,
IEC60870-5-103 communication
 Front mounted RS232 serial port for local PC communication
 Ethernet LAN port for IEC61850 communication
All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits
are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485, fibre optic port or
Ethernet LAN port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay
settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data
communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the IEC
61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 standards.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRD130 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.
 8 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
GRD130 -
Model Number
210 410
[APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP
[APPLVES] setting OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs OFF OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs
O/V IDMT                
O/V DT                
U/V IDMT                
U/V DT                
ZOV IDMT       
ZOV DT       
NOV IDMT          
NOV DT          
FRQ             
DFRQ             
SYN     
Trip circuit supervision                
Self supervision                
CB state monitoring                
Trip counter alarm                
Multiple settings groups                
Metering                
Fault records                
Event records                
Disturbance records                
IEC60870-5-103
               
communication
IEC61850 communication                
1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage
1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage
2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage
3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage
3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage
Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0
Vs: reference voltage for synchronism check
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
DT: definite time
O/V: overvoltage protection
U/V: undervoltage protection
ZOV: zero phase sequence overvoltage
NOV: negative phase sequence overvoltage
FRQ: Frequency protection
DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection
SYN: synchronism check
(): V0 calculated from three phase voltages
CAUTION: Do not change the APPL and APPLVES setting under service condition of the relay.
 9 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2. Application Notes
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection
GRD130 provides four independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable

dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or
definite time (DT) operation. OV3 and OV4 have definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.
Pickup
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements
The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
  
   c
t (G )  TMS   
k
(1)
 
 
a
 V  1 
  Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description k a c
“IDMT” 1 1 0
“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 0.00 – 5.00 0.000 – 5.000
by 0.001 step by 0.01 step by 0.001 step
 10 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The OV3 and OV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing
tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls
below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of
the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.
Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV4.
The OV1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal
OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
 11 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
in Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection
OV3 and OV4. The OV3 and OV4 give trip and alarm signals OV3_TRIP and OV4_ALARM
through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3 and TOV4 respectively.
The OV1 to OV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV4EN] or the
PLC signals OV1_BLOCK to OV4_BLOCK respectively.
51 TOV1
1() & & t 0 102
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1 2() 52 1
3() 53 & & t 0 103

OV1-B_TRIP
1
39 & & t 0 104
1() OV1-C_TRIP
1
OV1 2() 40 0.00 - 300.00s
INST
3() 41
& 101
1 OV1_TRIP
[OV1EN] "DT"
1
+ &
"IDMT"
1584 OV1_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection
54 TOV2
1() & & t 0 109
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2 2() 55 1
3() 56 & & t 0 110

OV2-B_TRIP
1
45 & & t 0 111
1() OV2-C_TRIP
46
1
OV2 2() 0.00 - 300.00s
INST
47
3()
& 108
1 OV2_TRIP
[OV2EN] "DT"
1
+ &
"IDMT"
1585 OV2_BLOCK 1 &
57 TOV3
1() & & t 0 116
OV3-A_TRIP
OV3 2() 58
3() 59 & & t 0 117

OV3-B_TRIP
[OV3EN]
& & t 0 118
+ OV3-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s 115
1586 OV3_BLOCK 1 1 OV3_TRIP
 12 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
518 TOV4
1() & & t 0 436
OV4-A_ALARM
OV4 2() 519
3() 520 & & t 0 437

OV4-B_ALARM
[OV4EN]
& & t 0 438
+ OV4-C_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s 435
1587 OV4_BLOCK 1 1 OV4_ALARM
()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
[APPL] setting
Phase
1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 －－－ C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting
TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.
TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.
TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.
OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting
TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.
TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.
TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.
OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.
TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.
OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1% 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV4 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV4 threshold setting.
TOV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV4 definite time setting.
OV4DPR 10 - 98 % 1% 95 % OV4 DO/PU ratio setting.
[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable
[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable
[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable
[OV4EN] Off / On Off OV4 Enable
 13 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection
GRD130 provides four independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are
programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 and UV4 have
definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.
0 V
Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements
The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)
following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
  
   c
t (G )  TMS   
k
a   (2)
  
 1  V
Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
The UV3 and UV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has
travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
 14 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Undervoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.12 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV4.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal
UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.1.11 and Figure 2.1.12 show the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage
protection UV3 and UV4. The UV3 and UV4 give trip and alarm signals UV3_TRIP and
UV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3 and TUV4 respectively.
The UV1 to UV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV4EN] or the
PLC signals UV1_BLOCK to UV4_BLOCK respectively.
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages
drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV4 are prevented from operating. This function can be
blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used)
when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load
shedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
 15 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
60 TUV1
1() & & t 0 123
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1 2() 61 1
62 & & t 0 124
UV1-B_TRIP
3()
1
157
1() & & t 0 125
UV1-C_TRIP
UV1 2() 158 1
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
3() 159
UVBLK 122
566 97
1 UV1_TRIP
1() &
567 1 NON
UVBLK2() & UVBLK
3() 568 &
[VBLKEN]
+ &
"ON"
[UVTST]
+ "DT"
"OFF" [UV1EN]
1
+
"IDMT"
1588 UV1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection
63 TUV2
1() & & t 0 130
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2 2() 64 1
65 & & t 0 131
UV2-B_TRIP
3()
1
177
1() & & t 0 132
UV2-C_TRIP
UV2 2() 178 NON 1
INST UVBLK 0.00 - 300.00s
179
3() "DT"
[UV2EN]
1 1
129
UV2_TRI
+ & P
"IDMT"
1589 UV2_BLOCK 1 &
&
66 TUV3
1() & & t 0 137
67 UV3-A_TRIP
UV3 2()
68 t 0 138
3() & & UV3-B_TRIP
[UV3EN]
+ & & t 0 139
UV3-C_TRIP
"ON"
NON BLK 0.00 - 300.00s
136
1 UV3_TRIP
1590 UV3_BLOCK 1
 16 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
528 TUV4
1() & & t 0 444
529 UV4-A_ALARM
UV4 2()
530 t 0 445
3() & & UV4-B_ALARM
[UV4EN]
+ & & t 0 446
UV4-C_ALARM
"ON"
NON BLK 0.00 - 300.00s
443
1 UV4_ALARM
1591 UV4_BLOCK 1
()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
[APPL] setting
Phase
1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 －－－ C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.
TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.
TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.
TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.
TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.
UV4 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV4 threshold setting.
TUV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV4 definite time setting.
VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.
[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C DT UV1 Enable
[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable
[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C DT UV2 Enable
[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable
[UV4EN] Off / On Off UV4 Enable
 17 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZOV) is applied to earth fault detection on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.
The ZOV is available for the following models and their [APPLVES] settings:
Model 210 410
[APPLVES] setting － Off Ve Vs
ZOV (1) (2) (1) (2)
Note: (1); V0 is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage.
(2); V0 is calculated from the three measured phase voltages.
The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZOV element susceptible to any 3rd
harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic
filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.
For the earth fault detection, following two methods are in general use.
 Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by VT residual connection (broken-delta
connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.
 Measuring the residual voltage across the earthing transformers as shown in Figure 2.2.14.
A B C
GRD130
V0
Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System
A B
C
GRD130
V0
Resistor
Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator
Two independent elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 are provided. These elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
 18 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC
60255-127:
  
 k   c (3)
t (G )  TMS     
 
a
 V  1 
  Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN].
If required, set the scheme switch [ZOVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
ZOV Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
1.000
T MS = 10
T MS = 5
T MS = 2
0.100
T MS = 1
0.010
0 5 10 15 20
Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZOV
 19 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is
identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage
protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 with independent
thresholds output trip signals ZOV1 TRIP and ZOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers
TZOV1 and TZOV2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN] or PLC signals
ZOV1 BLOCK and ZOV2 BLOCK.
93 TZOV1
ZOV1 t 0
& & 143
ZOV1 197 1 ZOV1 TRIP
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[ZOV1EN] 1
+ &
"IDMT"
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.16 ZOV1 Overvoltage Protection
94 TZOV2
ZOV2 t 0
& & 144
ZOV2 198 1 ZOV2_ALARM
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[ZOV2EN] 1
+ &
"IDMT"
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.17 ZOV2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
ZOV1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZOV1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.
TZOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=IDMT.
TZOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZOV1 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=DT.
TZOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV1 definite time delayed reset.
ZOV2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZOV2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.
TZOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=IDMT.
TZOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZOV2 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=DT.
TZOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV2 definite time delayed reset.
[APPLVES] Off / Ve / Vs Ve Ves(VT) setting
[ZOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZOV1 Enable
[ZOV2EN] Off / On Off ZOV2 Enable
 20 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect voltage unbalance
conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.
The NOV protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be
caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can
lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.
The NOV protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if
the phase sequence is reversed.
Two independent elements NOV1 and NOV2 are provided. The elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC
60255-127.
  
 k   c (4)
t (G )  TMS     
 
a
 V  1 
  Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN].
If required, set the scheme switch [NOVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
 21 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
NOV Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000

10.000
1.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0 5 10 15 20
Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NOV
Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NOV1 element when the inverse time delay is
used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.
Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NOV1 and NOV2 with independent thresholds
output trip signals NOV1 TRIP and NOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNOV1 and
TNOV2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN] or PLC signals
NOV1 BLOCK and NOV2 BLOCK.
95 TNOV1
NOV1 t 0
& & 145
NOV1 199 1 NOV1 TRIP
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[NOV1EN] 1
+ &
"IDMT"
1596 NOV1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.19 NOV1 Overvoltage Protection
 22 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
96 TNOV2
NOV2 t 0
& & 146
NOV2 200 1 NOV2_ALARM
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[NOV2EN] 1
+ &
"IDMT"
1597 NOV2_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.20 NOV2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNOV1 and TNOV2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NOV1 and NOV2. The minimum operating time of the NOV elements is around 200ms.
NOV1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NOV1 threshold setting for tripping.
TNOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=IDMT.
TNOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOV1 definite time setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=DT.
TNOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV1 definite time delayed reset.
NOV2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NOV2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=IDMT.
TNOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOV2 definite time setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=DT.
TNOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV2 definite time delayed reset.
[NOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NOV1 Enable
[NOV2EN] Off / On Off NOV2 Enable
 23 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRD130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring
elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,
overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation
capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load
shedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage
due to overfrequency conditions.
Frequency rate of change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly
when the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.
2.2.1 Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting
value.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting
value.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5
ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive
times.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.2.1 shows characteristics of UF and OF elements.
Hz
OF
OF setting
UF setting
UF
0 V
FVBLK setting
Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Element
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.2 shows the scheme logic for the frequency protection in stage 1. The frequency
element FRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher
than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The FRQ1 element is
programmable for underfrequency or overfrequency operation by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [FRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal FRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) are the same logic of FRQ1
 24 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
TFRQ1
218 t 0 356
OF FRQ1_TRIP
FRQ1 & 1 & &
0.00 - 300.00s
1
UF
&
TFRQ2
219 t 0 357
OF FRQ2_TRIP
FRQ2 & 1 & &
0.00 - 300.00s
1
UF
&
TFRQ3
220 t 0 358
OF FRQ3_TRIP
FRQ3 & 1 & &
0.00 - 300.00s
1
UF
&
TFRQ4
221 t 0 359
OF FRQ4_TRIP
FRQ4 & 1 & &
0.00 - 300.00s
1
UF
&
222
FRQBLK 1 NON FRQBLK
[FRQ1EN] "OF"
"UF" 1
+
[FRQ2EN] "OF"
"UF" 1
+
[FRQ3EN] "OF"
"UF" 1
+
[FRQ4EN] "OF"
"UF" 1
+
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK 1
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK 1
1602 FRQ3_BLOCK 1
1603 FRQ4_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.2 Scheme Logic for Frequency Protection
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
FRQ1 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ1 frequency element setting
TFRQ1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ1
FRQBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting
FRQ1EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ1 Enable
 25 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element
The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). Each
of the two frequency stages in GRD130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay
rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in
frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.3 and calculate the Δf/Δt
every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive
times.
Both D and R elements output is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation
during undervoltage condition.
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 2.2.3 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.4 shows the scheme logic of frequency rate-of-change protection in stage 1. The
frequency rate-of-change element DFRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the
system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1).
The DFRQ1 element is programmable for frequency decay rate or frequency rise rate operation
by the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [DFRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal DFRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (DFRQ2) to stage 4 (DFRQ4) are the same logic of DFRQ1.
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
DFRQ1 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s DFRQ1 element setting
FRQBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting
DFRQ1EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ1 Enable
 26 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
225 360
R DFRQ1_TRIP
DFRQ1 & 1 & &
1
D
&
226 361
R DFRQ2_TRIP
DFRQ2 & 1 & &
1
D
&
227 362
R DFRQ3_TRIP
DFRQ3 & 1 & &
1
D
&
228 363
R DFRQ4_TRIP
DFRQ4 & 1 & &
1
D
&
222
FRQBLK 1 NON FRQBLK
[DFRQ1EN] "R"
"D" 1
+
[DFRQ2EN] "R"
"D" 1
+
[DFRQ3EN] "R"
"D" 1
+
[DFRQ4EN] "R"
"D" 1
+
1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK 1
1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK 1
1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK 1
1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.4 Scheme Logic of Frequency Rate-of-change Protection
2.2.3 Trip Circuit
The trip circuit of the frequency protection is configured with the combination of FRQ trip and
DFRQ trip. The trip circuit is configured by the PLC function as shown in Figure 2.2.5.
FRQ1 TRIP 1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP

1
DFRQ1 TRIP 1 355
FRQ_TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP 1 1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP
DFRQ2 TRIP
1
DFRQ3 TRIP
DFRQ4 TRIP
By PLC
2.2.5 Frequency Protection Trip circuit
 27 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.3 Synchronism Check function

GRD130 can offer an autoreclosing relay the voltage and synchronism check function.
There are four voltage modes in three-phase autoreclose mode, as shown below when all three
phases of the circuit breaker are open. The voltage and synchronism check is applicable to voltage
modes 1 to 3 and controls the energising process of the lines and busbars in the three-phase
autoreclose mode.
Voltage Mode 1 2 3 4
Busbar voltage (VB) live live dead dead
Line voltage (VL) live dead live dead
The synchronism check is performed for voltage mode 1 while the voltage check is performed for
voltage modes 2 and 3.
The mode 4 is used for manual closing.
[VCHK]
+
"OFF"
"LD"
"DL"
"DD"
"S"
TLBDL
OVB 534
t 0 VCHK_LBDL
&
414
&
412
0.01 - 10.00S 1 VCHK
536 TDBLL
UVB t 0 VCHK_DBLL &
415
&
533 0.01 - 10.00S
OVL
TDBDL
t 0 416 VCHK_DBDL &
&
535
UVL 0.01 - 10.00S
TSYN
532 t 0 413 VCHK_SYN
SYN
0.01 – 10.00S
Figure 2.3.6 Energising Control Scheme
Figure 2.3.6 shows the energising control scheme. The voltage and synchronism check output
signal VCHK is generated when the following conditions have been established;
 Synchronism check element SYN operates and on-delay timer TSYN is picked up.
 Busbar overvoltage detector OVB and line undervoltage detector UVL operate, and
on-delay timer TLBDL is picked up. (This detects live bus and dead line condition.)
 Busbar undervoltage detector UVB and line overvoltage detector OVL operate, and
on-delay timer TDBLL is picked up. (This detects dead bus and live line condition.)
Using the scheme switch [VCHK], the energising direction can be selected.
 28 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting of [VCHK] Energising control

LD Reclosed under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check
DL Reclosed under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check
DD Reclosed under "dead bus and dead line" condition
S Reclosed with synchronism check only.
OFF Reclosed without voltage and synchronism check.
When [VCHK] is set to "LD", the line is energised in the direction from the busbar to line under
"live bus and dead line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DL", the line is energised in the
direction from the line to busbar under "dead bus and live line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to
"DD", the line is under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
When a synchronism check output exists, autoreclose is executed regardless of the scheme switch
position.
When [VCHK] is set to "S", a three-phase autoreclose is performed with the synchronism check
only.
When [VCHK] is set to "OFF", three-phase autoreclose is performed without voltage and
synchronism check.
The voltage and synchronism check requires a single-phase voltage from the busbar and the line.
Additionally, it is not necessary to fix the phase of the reference voltage.
To match the busbar voltage and line voltage for the voltage and synchronism check option
mentioned above, the GRD130 has the following three switches and VT ratio settings as shown in
Figure 2.3.7.
[VTPHSEL]: This switch is used to match the voltage phases. If the A-phase voltage or
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used as a reference voltage, "A" is selected.
[VT-RATE]: This switch is used to match the magnitude and phase angle. "PH-G" is
selected when the reference voltage is a single-phase voltage while "PH-PH"
is selected when it is a phase-to-phase voltage.
[VES-RATE]: This switch is for reference voltage (Ves) and the setting method is same is
above.
[3PH-VT]: "Bus"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Busbar voltage (VB).
- The reference voltage (Ves) is Line voltage(VL).
"Line"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Line voltage (VL).
- The reference voltage (Ves) is Busbar voltage(VB).
 29 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Three phase Va
voltages Vb
Voltage check
Vc &
Reference Synchronism check
Ves
voltage
[VTPHSEL]
+ "A"
+
"B"
+
"C"
[VT - RATE]
+
"PH-PH"
+
"PH-G"
[VES - RATE]
+
"PH-PH"
+
"PH-G"
[3PH - VT]
+
"Bus"
+
"Line"
Figure 2.3.7 Matching of Busbar Voltage and Line Voltage
Characteristics of OVL, UVL, OVB, UVB, and SYN

The voltage check and synchronism check elements are used for autoreclose.
The output of the voltage check element is used to check whether the line voltage (VL) and busbar
voltage (VB) are dead or live. The voltage check element has undervoltage detectors UVL and
UVB, and overvoltage detectors OVL and OVB for the line voltage and busbar voltage check.
The under voltage detector checks that the line or busbar is dead while the overvoltage detector
checks that it is live. These detectors function in the same manner as other level detectors
described later.
Figure 2.3.8 shows the voltage and synchronism check zone.
VL Line voltage
(Incoming voltage)
Dead bus and Live bus and

live line live line
A B
OVL
A, C, D: Voltage check
B: Synchronism check
Dead bus and Live bus and

dead line dead line
UVL
C D
VB Busbar voltage
0V UVB OVB (Runningvoltage)
Figure 2.3.8 Voltage and Synchronism Check Zone
 30 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The synchronism check element SYN is composed of the following check functions:
- SYN(SYN): checks the phase angle difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)
- SYNUV/OV: check the line voltage and the busbar voltage
- SYNV(SYNDV): checks the voltage difference between the line voltage (incoming
- SYNf(SYNDf): checks the frequency difference between the line voltage (incoming
The SYN is configured by these detectors as shown in Figure 2.3.9. The SYNf can be disabled
by the scheme switch [DfEN].
SYNΔθ
&
SYNUV/OV
& SYN
OUTPUT
SYNΔV
[DfEN]
+ "Off"
SYNΔf
"On"
Figure 2.3.9 Block diagram of SYN1
Figure 2.3.10 shows the characteristics of the synchronism check element used for the autoreclose
if the line and busbar are live.
The synchronism check element operates if both the voltage difference and phase angle difference
are within their setting values.
S = SYN setting
VL
s VB

V
SYNOV
SYNUV
Figure 2.3.10 Synchronism Check
For the element SYN, the voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
SYNOV  VB  SYNUV
SYNOV  VL  SYNUV
V = |VL  VB|  Vs
where,
 31 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Vs = Voltage difference setting

VB = busbar voltage
VL = line voltage
SYNOV = lower voltage setting
SYNUV = upper voltage setting
V = Voltage difference
The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.
f = |fVL1  fVB|  fs
where,
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
f = frequency difference
fs= frequency difference setting
The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
VB  VL cos   0
VB  VL sin (SYNS)  VB  VL sin
where,
 = phase difference between VB and VL
SYNs = phase difference setting
Note: The relay can directly detect a slip cycle (frequency difference f) if f is not used.
When the phase difference setting SYNs and the synchronism check time setting
TSYN are given a detected maximum slip cycle is determined using the following
equation:
SYNs
f=
180°×TSYN
s
where,
f = slip cycle
SYNs = phase difference setting (degree)
TSYN = setting of synchronism check timer TSYN (second)
 32 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the voltage and synchronism check function and their setting
ranges are shown in the table below.
OVB 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V Live bus check
UVB 10 - 150 V 1V 13 V Dead bus check
OVL 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V Live line check
UVL 10 - 150 V 1V 13 V Dead line check
SYNUV 10 - 150 V 1V 83 V UV element of synchronism check
SYNOV 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V OV element of synchronism check
SYNDV 0 - 150 V 1V 150 V Voltage difference for SYN
SYN  5 - 75° 1° 30° Synchronism check (phase angle difference)
SYNDf 0.01 – 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.00 Hz Frequency difference check for SYN
TSYN 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Synchronism check time (Live-bus & Live-line)
TLBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (Live-bus & Dead-line)
TDBLL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (dead-bus & Live-line)
TDBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (Dead-bus & Dead-line)
[VCHK] Off/LD/DL/DD/S Off Autoreclosing voltage check
[DfEN] Off/On Off Frequency difference checking enable
[VTPHSEL] A/B/C A VT phase selection
[VT-RATE] PH-G / PH-PH PH-G VT rating
[VES-RATE] PH-G / PH-PH PH-G Ves rating
[3PH-VT] Bus / Line Line 3-phase VT location
 33 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
2.4 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRD130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figures 2.4.1 shows gathered trip and alarm signals for each
protection.
GRD130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.7. These
auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection outputs by PLC function.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be programmed by PLC function. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the` status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
OV3 TRIP 1 371
GEN_TRIP
UV1 TRIP
UV2 TRIP
UV3 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP
NOV1 TRIP
OV1-A TRIP
OV2-A TRIP 372
GEN_TRIP-A
OV3-A TRIP 1
UV1-A TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
UV3-A TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV2-B TRIP 373
GEN_TRIP-B
OV3-B TRIP 1
UV1-B TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
UV3-B TRIP
2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs
 34 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
OV1-C TRIP
OV2-C TRIP 374
GEN_TRIP-C
OV3-C TRIP 1
UV1-C TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
UV3-C TRIP
375
ZOV1_TRIP GEN. TRIP-N

1
DFRQ1 TRIP 1 355
FRQ_TRIP
DFRQ2 TRIP
1
DFRQ3 TRIP
DFRQ4 TRIP
By PLC
OV4 ALARM
380
UV4 ALARM 1 GEN_ALARM
ZOV2 ALARM
NOV2 ALARM
OV4-A ALARM 1 381

GEN_ALARM-A
UV4-A ALARM
OV4-B ALARM
1 382
GEN_ALARM-B
UV4-B ALARM
OV4-C ALARM
1 383
GEN_ALARM-C
UV4-C ALARM
384
ZOV2 ALARM GEN_ALARM-N
2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)
 35 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRD130 is shown in Appendix E.

The hardware structure of GRD130 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.
The GRD130 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in a
frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided
with the front panel.
 Power module (POWD)
 Signal processing module (SPMD)
 Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRD130 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.
SPMD
POWD
HMI
IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM
RESET
A B 0V
CAN
CEL ENTER
Handle for relay END
withdrawal
Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case
 36 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ETH
POWD SPMD2
DC Ethernet LAN I/F
DC/DC  1 or 2 Remote PC
supply
Converter
Binary Photo-coupler RS485 or

input V 8 Remote PC
Optical fibre
port  1
AC input Binary output

Analogue Multi- A/D Auxiliary relay
V MPU (Trip
VT x 4 filter plexer converter 8 command etc.)
(Max)
IRIG-B port External

RAM ROM clock
Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display

16 characters  2 lines
LEDs Operation keys
Local
personal RS232C Monitoring
computer I/F jacks
Models 110D and 410D
Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram
POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary VTs, DC/DC converter and 8 photo-coupler circuits
for binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or
220/250V. The normal range of input voltage is shown in Appendix I.
SPMD Module (SPMD2)

The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of
2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
RS485, fibre optic and/or Ethernet LAN serial ports are provided for communication to a remote
PC, and IRIG-B port also can be provided for external clock. Ethernet LAN ports are mounted on
ETH sub-module.
Auxiliary relays for binary output signals are provided.
The SPMD module incorporates 8 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO7 and FAIL) for binary output
 37 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
signals. Auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6 are user configurable output signals and have one normally
open and one normally closed contact. BO7 is also a user-configurable output signal and has one
normally open contact. (Refer to Appendix F.) The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open
and one normally closed contacts, and operates when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC
circuit is detected.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module

The operator can access the GRD130 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 9 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow
(LED2) Yellow
(LED3) Yellow
(LED4) Yellow
(LED5) Yellow
(LED6) Yellow
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses
of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section
4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user, either
by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element
such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the
signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see
 38 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix B.)
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
Screw for cover
Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
RESET
Operation keys
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
A B 0V CAN
Monitoring Jacks CEL ENTER
RS232C connector END
To a local PC
Screw for handle Screw for cover
Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel
 39 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRD130 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Their terminal members depend on their scheme switch [APPLVES]
setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPLVES] setting
Model
Term. No.
210 410
of TB1
1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP
Phase-to- Phase-to- A-B phase A phase A-B phase A-B phase

1-2 phase neutral voltage voltage voltage voltage
voltage voltage
B-C phase B phase B-C phase B-C phase

3-4 Ve or Vs (*) Ve or Vs (*) voltage voltage voltage voltage
--- --- --- C phase C-A phase ---

5-6 voltage voltage
7-8 --- --- --- --- Ve or Vs (*) Ve or Vs (*)

(*): Residual voltage Ve or Reference voltage Vs for synchronism check depend on the [APPLVES]
setting.
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRD130 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.
The binary input circuit of the GRD130 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary
switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the
inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving
contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then
“Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to
300.00s respectively.
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS - BI8SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BI1PUD - BI8PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD - BI8DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between eight settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2647).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by
setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the
LCD. These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.
 40 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GRD130
(+) () BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]
BI1 1284 t 0 0 t 768
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 1285 t 0 0 t 769
BI2
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI8PUD BI8DOD [BI8SNS]

BI8 1291 t 0 0 t 775
BI8
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
0V
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRD130 provides 8 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail
output and seven programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO7. BO1 to BO7 can be programmed.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The
setting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BOs
individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or
OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured
according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Inst”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Latch” by
the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can
be set by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous
for the input signal time.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
 41 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Signal List
& Auxiliary relay

6 GATES
Appendix B
or 1
1
6 GATES
&
TBO
0 t
&
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl"
& S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+

By PLC 1
768
BI1_COMMAND 1639 IND.RESET
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Inst Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C
 42 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRD130 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logic on binary
signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation trigger of fault records and disturbance records are
programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for
using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to the PLC
tool instruction manual.
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool
 43 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRD130 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
 The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a failure occurs, it is recorded as Alarm record, the user should be able to easily identify
the location of the failure.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
 Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= “3PN” setting
|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3  6.35 (V)
 Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= “3PN” setting
|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3  6.35 (V)
where, a = Phase shifter of 120, a2 = Phase shifter of 240
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection
of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits. These monitoring can be disabled by the
scheme switches [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] respectively.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the
voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been
connected with the incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are performed to
verify that memory circuits are healthy:
 Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
 Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
 Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
 44 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.1 shows
a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1632:TC_FAIL signal by PLC. When the
trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip circuit. Then
logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the BIn output is "0".
If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD
message.
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON".
(+) Trip circuit supervision
BIn
Trip t 0 1270
1632 TC_FAIL 1 & TCSV
output
0.4s
CB CLOSE
1
[TCSPEN]
+ "ON"
CB trip coil
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If two
binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then
the CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in
opposite states. Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five
seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD
message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to “CB_N/O_CONT” and
“CB_N/C_CONT” by PLC.
 45 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
t 0 1271
1633 CB_N/O_CONT =1 1 CBSV
&
5.0s
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.2 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit, the operation mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of CB:
 Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-. The default
setting is the TP_COUNT is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3.4 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring
If there is a failure in PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be prevented.
Therefore, PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and the respective alarms "PLC
stop" and "MAP stop" are issued if a failure is detected.
3.3.5 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring
The sending and receiving functions on the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The
receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending
function is executed by checking a “Ping” response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an
alarm of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.
These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].
3.3.6 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message,
LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision
items and alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed
automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event
record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The AC
input imbalance monitoring alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switches
 46 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
[CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary
alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD Message LED LED External Alarm record Message
"IN "ALARM" alarm
SERVICE"
AC input imbalance Err:V0, V0 err, V2 err,
On/Off (2) On (4)
monitoring Err:V2 (1) Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check Err:A/D Off On (4) Relay fail
Memory monitoring Err:SUM, Err:RAM,
Off On (4) Relay fail
Err:BRAM, Err:EEP
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
DC supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm ALM:TP COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
PLC data or IEC61850 Err: PLC, Err: MAP On On (4) Relay fail-A
mapping data monitoring
GOOSE message check Err: GOOSE On On (4) Relay fail-A
Ping response check Err: Ping On On (4) Relay fail-A
(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [V0SVEN] or [V2SVEN] is set to "ALM" and off when set
to "ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the
scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
3.3.7 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switches [V0SVEN]
and [V2SVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output,
or if only an alarm is output.
 47 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.3.8 Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.

[V0SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (Vo)
[V2SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (V2)
[TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
 48 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.4 Recording Function

The GRD130 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
Counters
These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on the local or remote
PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRD130 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input
signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Operating phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves)
- Frequency (f)
 49 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to
1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been stored, the
oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event
items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On”
(only recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by
setting. The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger
events” is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On”
mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set.
The set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.
BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events
EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates or
a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command
by the PLC is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632
to 2635) by PLC.
The records include maximum 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and
the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix C can be
assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording
Model Model 210 Model 410

APPL setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP
Vph Vph Vab Va Vab Vab
Ves Ves Vbc Vb Vbc Vbc
Analog signals
Vc Vca Ves
Ves Ves
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 5.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
 50 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.1s 1.0s 2.0s 3.0s 3.5s 4.0s 4.5s 5.0s
50Hz 40 15 8 6 5 4 4 3
60Hz 40 13 7 5 4 4 3 3
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Time 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 Post-fault recording time
OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection
UV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection
ZOV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection
NOV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation
[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation
[ZOV] OFF/ON ON Start by ZOV operation
[NOV] OFF/ON ON Start by NOV operation
 51 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.5 Metering Function

The GRD130 measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages, residual
voltage, symmetrical component voltages, and frequency. The measurement data shown below is
displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
Current: The following quantities are measured and updated every second.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage, or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Frequency (f)
Demand
- Maximum and minimum of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc: max, min)
- Maximum and minimum of zero sequence voltage (V0: max, min)
- Maximum and minimum of the system residual voltage or the reference voltage for
synchronism check (Ves: max, min)
- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in
4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is
averaged over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded
average values are shown on the display screen.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPLVT] and [APPLVES] settings and relay model as
shown in Table 3.5.1. Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for the
measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity

Model 210 410
APPL APPL APPL
Setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP
Va 
Vb 
Vc 
Vph  
Ves     
Vab    
Vbc    
Vca  
V1    
V2    
V0  
f      
 52 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and
Monitoring), IEC61850 communication or IEC60870-5-103 communication via Ethernet LAN
port or RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS-232C connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for
5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 9 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
LED1 to LED6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
 53 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
 , , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical
values and text strings.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off
the display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
VIEW and RESET keys
Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and
setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an
oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.
 54 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:

 RS232C port
 RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication
 IRIG-B port
RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed. (See Figure 3.1.3.)
RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port

The RS485 port or the fibre optic port is connected to the IEC60870-5-103 communication via
BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to construct
a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The RS485 port is a screw
terminal and the fibre optic port is the ST connector.
Ethernet LAN port is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication
networks using IEC 61850 protocol. This port can also be connected to the RSM. 100Base-TX
(T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the
back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
RS485 connection Fibre Optic

terminal (ST)
IRIG-B OPT
TB3 R IRIG-B
TB1 T
TB3
TB1
TB2
TB2
T1
F1
R
T
E E
Rear view Rear view

(a) RS485 + 100BASE-TX (b) Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX
Figure 4.1.1 Location of Communication Port
 55 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation

When the GRD130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", …., "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and
"Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest
screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Metering 1
V a    .   k V Available for model 410.
   .  
Metering 2
V b    .   k V Available for model 410.
   .  
Metering 3
V c    .   k V Available for model 410.
   .  
Metering 4
V p h    .   k V Available for model 210.
   .  
Metering 5
V e s    .   k V Not available for APPLVT=2PP in model 210.
   .  
Metering 6
V a b    .   k V
   .  
Metering 7
V b c    .   k V
   .  
Metering 8
V c a    .   k V Available for model 410.
   .  
Metering 9
 56 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
V 1    .   k V Available for model 410.

   .  
Metering 10
   .  
Metering 11
   .  
Metering 12
ff   .   H z
To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key for 3
seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C E : Faulted phases. Not displayed for model 110
O C 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.
 57 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status

Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 – LED6)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off
Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.
Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an alarm,
press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key
again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 58 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

             
        : A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRD130. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
 59 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Menu Record F. record

E. record
D. record
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Set. (change) Password

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Test Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 60 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or
SNTP), clock adjustment and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
M E N U
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 S e t . ( v i e w )
 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
 T e s t
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to
turn off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that
lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on
the window, use the and keys.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 61 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in
Appendix E, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o r d
 F . r e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.

/ 2 F . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top
in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
# 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 1 0 1
# 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 2 9 9
# 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 4 1 2
 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
 62 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
/ 4 F . r e c o r d # 1
0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 2
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
O V 1 Trip element
P h a s e A B B C C A
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.
V a    .   k V
   .  
V b    .   k V
   .  
V c    .   k V
   .  
V e s    .   k V
   .  
V a b    .   k V
   .  
V b c    .   k V
   .  
V c a    .   k V
   .  
V 1    .   k V
   .  
V 2    .   k V
   .  
V 0    .   k V
   .  
f   .   H z
d f    .   H z / s
F a u l t v a l u e s
V a    .   k V
   .  
V b    .   k V
   .  
V c    .   k V
   .  
V e s    .   k V
   .  
V a b    .   k V
   .  
V b c    .   k V
   .  
V c a    .   k V
   .  
V 0    .   k V
   .  
V 1    .   k V
   .  
V 2    .   k V
   .  
f   .   H z
d f    .   H z / s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to
the relay
 63 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:

 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

 Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 2 E . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9
O V 1 - A t r i p O n
1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9
O V 1 - A O n
1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9
R l y . c h a n g e
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 2 5 5
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 0 2 8
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 7 7 3
R l y . c h a n g e
Press the key to return the screen with date.
To clear all the event records, do the following:

 64 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

 Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/ 2 D . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 D . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 4 0 1
# 2 2 0 / S e p / 2 0 0 9
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 3 8 8
# 3 0 4 / J u l / 2 0 0 9
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 4 4 4
# 4 2 8 / F e b / 2 0 0 9
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 8 7 6
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
 65 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
/ 2 C o u n t e r
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r T r i p s
 C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
 C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
 C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
 Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s     
T r i p s A      (*)
T r i p s B      (*)
T r i p s C      (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
To clear each count, do the following:

 Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
 Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?
 Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?
 Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
 66 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Status of LCD contrast

The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 B i n a r y I / O
 R e l a y e l e m e n t
 T i m e s y n c .
 C l o c k a d j u s t .
 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g
 M e t e r i n g
 D e m a n d
 Select "Current" to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.
<Model 210>
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
V p h    .   k V
V e s    .   k V
   .  
V a b    .   k V
   .  
V b c    .   k V
   .  
V 1    .   k V
   .  
V 2    .   k V
   .  
f   .   H z
<Model 410>
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
V a    .   k V
   .  
V b    .   k V
   .  
V c    .   k V
   .  
V e s    .   k V
   .  
V a b    .   k V
   .  
V b c    .   k V
   .  
V c a    .   k V
   .  
V 1    .   k V
 67 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
   .  
V 2    .   k V
   .  
V 0    .   k V
   .  
f   .   H z
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to
the relay
 Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.

<Model 210>
/ 3 D e m a n d
V p h m a x    .   k V
V p h m i n    .   k V
V e s m a x    .   k V
V e s m i n    .   k V
V a b m a x    .   k V
V a b m i n    .   k V
V b c m a x    .   k V
V b c m i n    .   k V
f m a x   .   H z
f m i n   .   H z
<Model 410>
/ 3 D e m a n d
V a m a x    .   k V
V a m i n    .   k V
V b m a x    .   k V
V b m i n    .   k V
V c m a x    .   k V
V c m i n    .   k V
V e s m a x    .   k V
V e s m i n    .   k V
V a b m a x    .   k V
V a b m i n    .   k V
V b c m a x    .   k V
V b c m i n    .   k V
V c a m a x    .   k V
V c a m i n    .   k V
V 0 m a x    .   k V
V 0 m i n    .   k V
f m a x   .   H z
f m i n   .   H z
To clear all max data, do the following:
 Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r m a x ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.
 68 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
The display format is shown below.
[       ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 FAIL
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix H. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the
photo-coupler output circuit.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO7 are configurable. The status
of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay
driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
To display all the lines, press the and keys.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
O V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O V # 2 [ 0 0 0 ]
U V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
U V # 2 [ 0 0 0 ]
Z O V [ 0 0 ]
N O V [ 0 0 ]
F R Q [ 0 0 0 0 ]
S Y N [ 0 ]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[        ]
OV#1 OV1-A OV1-B OV1-C OV2-A OV2-B OV2-C OV3-A OV3-B OV3-C OV elements
OV#2 OV4-A OV4-B OV4-C OV elements
UV#1 UV1-A UV1-B UV1-C UV2-A UV2-B UV2-C UV3-A UV3-B UV3-C UV elements
UV#2 UV4-A UV4-B UV4-C UV elements
ZOV ZOV1 ZOV2 ZOV elements
NOV NOV1 NOV2 NOV elements
FRQ FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FRQ elements
SYN SYN SYN elements
 69 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRD130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks
are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the
following:
 Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
B I : A c t .
I R I G : I n a c t .
I E C : I n a c t .
 S N T P : A c t . ( S r v 1 )
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9 L o c Loc:Local, BI:BI, IRI:IRIG-B, IEC:IEC103, SNT:SNTP
M i n u t e
5 6 _
H o u r
2 2
D a y
1 2
M o n t h
1 1
Y e a r
2 0 0 9
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [IRI], [IEC], [SNT] or [RSM] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
 70 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
 Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
 Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
 V e r s i o n
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 B i n a r y O / P
 L E D
 Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n
 R e l a y t y p e
 71 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 S e r i a l N o .
 S o f t w a r e
 Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R D 1 3 0 - 4 1 0 D - 1 0
- A 0
 Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.

 Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
 M a i n s o f t w a r e
G S P D M 1 - 0 3 - 
 I E C 6 1 8 5 0 e n g .
G      -   - 
 P L C d a t a
P G R D 1 3 0 D    
(         )
 I E C 1 0 3 d a t a
I G R D 1 3 0 D    
(         )
 I E C 6 1 8 5 0 d a t a
X G R D 1 3 0 D    
(         )
 G O O S E s u b s c .
Y G R Z 1 0 0 D    
(         )
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
 72 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e)
 P a s s w o r d
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 L E D
 Move the cursor to a setting item.

 Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right.
"" and "" on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
 73 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
 Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.

 Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O V V
1 2 0 . 0
U V V
6 0 . 0
Z O V V
2 0 . 0
N O V V
2 0 . 0
 Move the cursor to a setting line.

 Press the or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or
key.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
 74 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
 Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns
back to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made
so far and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
/ 2 P a s s w o r d
 S e t t i n g
 T e s t
 Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.

 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
I n p u t  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different
from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password"
screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
 Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.
 75 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
P a s s w o r d  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen.
The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRD130 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
 A l a r m 1 T e x t
 To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E
F G
H I J K L
M N
O P Q R S
T U
V W X Y 
Z
a b c d e
f g
h i j k l
m n
o p q r s
t u
v w x y 
z
0 1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 76 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s .
 A d d r . / P a r a m .
 S w i t c h
 Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m
I E C
2 _
S Y A D J
0
I P 1 - 1
1 9 2
I P 1 - 2
1 6 8
I P 1 - 3
1 9
I P 1 - 4
1 7 2
S M 1 - 1
2 5 5
S M 1 - 2
2 5 5
S M 1 - 3
2 5 5
S M 1 - 4
0
G W1 - 1
1 9 2
G W1 - 2
1 6 8
G W1 - 3
1 9
G W 1 - 4
1
:
:
S I 4 - 1
0
S I 4 - 2
0
S I 4 - 3
0
S I 4 - 4
0
 77 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
S M O D E
0
D E A D T m i n
1 2 0
G O I N T s
6 0
P G 1 - 1
0
P G 1 - 2
0
P G 1 - 3
0
P G 1 - 4
0
P G 2 - 1
0
P G 2 - 2
0
P G 2 - 3
0
P G 2 - 4
0
 Enter the address number on "IEC" column for IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value
on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time synchronization of protocol used (: lags the
time, +: leads the time).
Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and
synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time.
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: , , , 
IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4
SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.
 Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not overlap the relay address number.

 Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.
/ 3 S w i t c h .
2 3 2 C 0
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
I E C B R 1
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
I E C B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
8 5 0 B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
 78 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
8 5 0 A U T 0
O f f / O n
T S T M O D 0
O f f / O n
G S E C H K
O f f / O n
P I N G C H K
O f f / O n
 Select the number and press the ENTER key.

<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to serve
user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<850BLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC61850 communication.
<850AUT>
With IEC61850 communication, GRD130 provides access restriction which permits a client
access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password). The
password is a 4-digit number shared with RSM100.
Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address
which is set on PG-.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
 79 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/ 2 R e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording

/ 3 E . r e c o r d
B I T R N
1 0 0 _
E V 1
3 0 0 1 _
E V 2
3 0 0 2 _
E V 3
3 0 0 3 _
:
:
E V 1 2 7
3 1 2 7 _
E V 1 2 8
3 1 2 8 _
<BITRN>
Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered,
both status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is
recorded for EV21 to EV128 events.
<EV>
Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record as the event. It is recommended that this setting
can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen. (Refer
to Section 3.4.2.)
Setting the disturbance recording

/ 3 D . r e c o r d
 T i m e / s t a r t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 B i n a r y s i g .
 Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O V V
1 2 0 . 0
U V V
 80 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6 0 . 0
Z O V V
2 0 . 0
N O V V
2 0 . 0
 Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p 1 _
O f f / O n
O V 1
O f f / O n
U V 1
O f f / O n
Z O V 1
O f f / O n
N O V 1
O f f / O n
 Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
 Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1
3 0 0 1 _
S I G 2
3 0 0 2
S I G 3
3 0 0 3
S I G 3 2
3 0 3 2
 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix C.
Setting the counter

/ 3 C o u n t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N 0 _
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
T C A E N 0
O f f / O n
 81 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set threshold setting, do the following:
 Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t
T C A L M
1 0 0 0 0 _
 Enter the threshold settings.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 T i m e s y n c .
 T i m e z o n e
Setting the metering

 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y 0 _
P r i m . / S e c o n d .
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Prim.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).
Enter 1(=Second.) to display the secondary side current.
Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, RSM clock, or
by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.
 Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c 0 _
O f / B I / I R I / I E C / S N
 Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=of) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=IRI) to be synchronised with IRIG-B time signal.
Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.
Enter 4(=SN) to be synchronised with SNTP.
Note: When selecting BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, check that they are active on the
 82 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
"Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.

If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to
transform GMT to the local time.
 Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
/ 3 T i m e z o n e
G M T h r s
+ 9 _
G M T m M i n
+ 0
 Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs) and
GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRD130 can have 8 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
 Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
 C h a n g e a c t . g p .
 C h a n g e s e t .
 C o p y g p .
Changing the active group

 Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . 1 _
 Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix H. To change the settings, do the following:
 Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 
 C o m m o n
 G r o u p 1
 G r o u p 2
 G r o u p 3
 G r o u p 4
 G r o u p 5
 G r o u p 6
 83 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 G r o u p 7
 G r o u p 8
Changing the Common settings

 Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the
ENTER key.
<Model 210>
/ 4 C o m m o n
A P P L 1 _
1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P
A P P L V E S
O f f / V e / V s
V 2 S V E N 2
O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M
A O L E D 1
O f f / O n
<Model 4210>
/ 4 C o m m o n
A P P L 1 _
3 P N / 3 P P / 2 P P
A P P L V E S
O f f / V e / V s
V 0 S V E N 2
V 2 S V E N 2
A O L E D 1
O f f / O n
<APPL>
 Enter 0(=1PP or 3PN), 1(=1PN or 3PP), or 2(=2PP) to set the voltage input state and press the
ENTER key.
<APPLVES>
 Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=Ve: used zero-sequence voltage is input directly) or 2(=Vs: used
voltage for synchronism check) and press the ENTER key.
AOLED
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
 Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 V0SVEN, V2SVEN
To set AC input imbalance supervision enable, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the or key and press the
ENTER key.
 84 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Changing the Group settings

 Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/ 4 G r o u p 
 P a r a m e t e r
 T r i p
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name, the CT/VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:
 Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
 L i n e n a m e
 V T r a t i o
 Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

 Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
 Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.
/ 6 V T r a t i o
P V T
1 0 0
V E S V T for Ve or Vs
1 0 0
 Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
 O V
 U V
 Z O V
 N O V
 F R Q
 S Y N
Setting the OV protection
The settings for the OV protection are as follows:
 Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V
 85 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
O V 1 E N 0 _
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
O V 2 E N 0
O V 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
O V 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
OV1EN, <OV2EN>
To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.
 Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
OV3EN, <OV4EN>
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3 or OV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3 or
OV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection

The settings for the UV protection are as follows:
 Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7 U V
U V 1 E N 1 _
U V 2 E N 1
U V 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
U V 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
V B L K E N 0
O f f / O n
UV1EN, <UV2EN>
To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.
disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UV3EN, <UV4EN>
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3 or UV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3 or
UV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 86 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
VBLKEN
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV
blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the ZOV protection

The settings for the ZOV protection are as follows:
 Select "ZOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.
/ 7 Z O V
Z O V 1 E N 1 _
Z O V 2 E N 0
ZOV1EN, <ZOV2EN>
To set the ZOV1 and ZOV2 delay type, do the following.
disabling the ZOV1 or ZOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the NOV protection

The settings for the NOV protection are as follows:
 Select "NOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/ 7 N O V
N O V 1 E N 1 _
N O V 2 E N 0
NOV1EN, <NOV2EN>
To set the NOV1 and NOV2 delay type, do the following.
disabling the NOV1 or NOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 87 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting the FRQ protection

The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
 Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q
F R Q 1 E N 0 _
O f f / O F / U F
F R Q 2 E N 0
O f f / O F / U F
F R Q 3 E N 0
O f f / O F / U F
F R Q 4 E N 0
O f f / O F / U F
D F R Q 1 E N 0
O f f / R / D
D F R Q 2 E N 0
O f f / R / D
D F R Q 3 E N 0
O f f / R / D
D F R Q 4 E N 0
O f f / R / D
FRQEN
To set the FRQ scheme enable, do the following.
 Enter 1(=OF, overfrequency) or 2(=UF, underfrequency) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
DFRQEN
To set the FRQ scheme enable, do the following.
 Enter 1(=R, frequency rise rate) or 2(=UF, frequency decay rate) and press the ENTER key.
If disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the SYN function

The settings for the SYN function are as follows:
 Select "SYN" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SYN" screen.
/ 7 S Y N
V C H K 0
O f f / L D / D L / D D / S
D f E N 0
O f f / O n
V T P H S E L 0
A / B / C
V T - R A T E 0
 88 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
P H - G / P H - P H
V E S - R A T E 0
P H - G / P H - P H
3 P H - V T 0
B u s / L i n e
<VCHK>
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Off) to perform the reclose without voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= LD) to perform the reclose under "live bus and dead line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 2 (= DL) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and live line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 3 (= DD) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
Enter 4 (= S) to perform the reclose with synchronism check.
<DfEN>
 Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the f checking function.
Enter 1 (= On) to use the f checking function.
<VTPHSEL>
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= A) not to use A-phase voltage for voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= B) to use B-phase voltage.
Enter 2 (= C) to use C-phase voltage.
<VT-RATE>

Enter 0 (= PH-G) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-earth voltage.
Enter 1 (= PH-PH) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-phase voltage.
<VES-RATE>

Enter 0 (= PH-G) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-earth voltage.
Enter 1 (= PH-PH) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-phase voltage.
<3PH-VT>

Enter 0 (= Bus) if three-phase voltage is applied to the bus side.
Enter 1 (= Line) if three-phase voltage is applied to the line side..
 89 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 O V
 U V
 Z O V
 N O V
 F R Q
 S Y N
Setting the OV elements

 Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V
O V 1 V OV1 Threshold setting.

1 2 0 . 0 _
T O V 1 s OV1 Definite time delay.
1 . 0 0
T O V 1 M OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
1 . 0 0
T O V 1 R s OV1 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
O V 1 D P R % OV1 DO/PU ratio
9 5
1 4 0 . 0
:
:
9 5
2 4 0 . 0
1 . 0 0
9 5
1 4 0 . 0
1 . 0 0
9 5
O V 1 - k OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
O V 1 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
O V 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
O V 2 - k OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
O V 2 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
O V 2 - C ditto
 90 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
0 . 0 0 0
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the UV elements

 Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7 U V
U V 1 V UV1 Threshold setting.

6 0 . 0 _
T U V 1 s UV1 Definite time delay.
1 . 0 0
T U V 1 M UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
1 . 0 0
T U V 1 R s UV1 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
4 0 . 0
T U V 2 s UV2 Definite time setting.
1 . 0 0
T U V 2 R s UV2 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
4 0 . 0
1 . 0 0
4 0 . 0
1 . 0 0
V B L K V UV Blocking threshold
1 0 . 0
U V 1 - k UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
U V 1 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
U V 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
U V 2 - k UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
U V 2 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
U V 2 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
 91 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting the ZOV elements

 Select "ZOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.
/ 7 Z O V
Z O V 1 V ZOV1 Threshold setting.

2 0 . 0 _
T Z O V 1 s ZOV1 Definite time setting.
1 . 0 0
T Z O V 1 M ZOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
1 . 0 0
T Z O V 1 R s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
Z O V 2 V ZOV2 Threshold setting.
4 0 . 0
T Z O V 2 s ZOV2 Definite time setting.
1 . 0 0
T Z O V 2 M ZOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
1 . 0 0
T Z O V 2 R s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
Z O V 1 - k ZOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
Z O V 1 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
Z O V 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
Z O V 2 - k ZOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
Z O V 2 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
Z O V 2 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
Setting the NOV protection elements

 Select "NOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/ 7 N O V
N O V 1 V NOV1 Threshold setting.

2 0 . 0 _
T N O V 1 s NOV1 Definite time setting.
1 . 0 0
T N O V 1 M NOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
 92 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
1 . 0 0
T N O V 1 R s NOV1 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
N O V 2 V NOV2 Threshold setting.
4 0 . 0
T N O V 2 s NOV2 Definite time setting.
1 . 0 0
T N O V 2 M NOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
1 . 0 0
T N O V 2 R s NOV2 Definite time reset delay.
0 . 0
N O V 1 - k NOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
N O V 1 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
N O V 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
N O V 2 - k NOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
1 . 0 0
N O V 2 -  ditto
1 . 0 0
N O V 2 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
Setting the FRQ elements

 Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q
F R Q 1 H z
 1 . 0 0 _
T F R Q 1
1 . 0 0
F R Q 2 H z
 1 . 0 0
T F R Q 2
1 . 0 0
F R Q 3 H z
 1 . 0 0
T F R Q 3
1 . 0 0
F R Q 4 H z
 1 . 0 0 _
T F R Q 4
1 . 0 0
F V B L K V UV Blocking threshold
4 0 . 0
D F R Q 1 H z s
0 . 5
 93 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
D F R Q 2 H z s
0 . 5
D F R Q 3 H z s
0 . 5
D F R Q 4 H z s
0 . 5
Setting SYN function

 Select "SYN" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SYN" screen.
/ 7 S Y N
O V B V
5 1
U V B V
1 3
O V L V
5 1
U V L V
1 3
S Y N U V V
8 3
S Y N O V V
5 1
S Y N D V V
1 5 0
S Y N  d e g
3 0
S Y N D f H z
1 . 0 0
T S Y N s
1 . 0 0
T L B D L s
0 . 0 5
T D B L L s
0 . 0 5
T D B D L s
0 . 0 5
O C - C O A
1 . 0 0
E F - C O A
0 . 3 0
S E - C O A
0 . 0 1 0
 94 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
 Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C o p y A t o B
A _
B
 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
 Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
. B I 1
. B I 2
. B I 3
. B I 4
. B I 5
. B I 6
. B I 7
. B I 8
Selection of Binary Input

 Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
/ 3 B I 
 T i m e r s
 F u n c t i o n s
Setting timers
 Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
P U D s Pick-up delay setting

0 . 0 0 _
D O D s Drop-off delay setting
0 . 0 0
 95 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
 Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
S N S 1 _
N o r m / I n v
 To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRD130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 B O 1
 B O 2
 B O 3
 B O 4
 B O 5
 B O 6
 B O 7
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/ 3 B O 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and timer

 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
 96 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
1 0 0 0 _
I n # 2
1 0 0 1
I n # 3
1 0 0 2
I n # 4
1 0 0 3
I n # 5
1 0 0 4
I n # 6
1 0 0 5
T B O s
0 . 2 0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 (signal names: "BO1
OP" to "BO7 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six LEDs of the GRD130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix C can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
 97 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Selection of LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
 L E D
 V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs

 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
 L E D 1
 L E D 2
 L E D 3
 L E D 4
 L E D 5
 L E D 6
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and reset type

 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
1 0 0 0 _
I n # 2
1 0 0 1
I n # 3
1 0 0 2
I n # 4
1 0 0 3
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
 98 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Selection of virtual LEDs

 Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
 I N D 1
 I N D 2
 Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4 I N D 
 R e s e t
Setting the reset timing

 Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t
R e s e t 0 _
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
B I T 1
1 0 0 0 _
B I T 2
1 0 0 1
B I T 8
1 0 0 7
 Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

 99 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.2.7 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test
screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If the
password trap ser, enter the password in the following screen.
P a s s w o r d  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.
4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
 Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
 S w i t c h
 L o g i c c i r c u i t
 Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t c h
A . M . F . 1 _
O f f / O n
U V T S T 0
O f f / O n
I E C T S T 0
O f f / O n
 Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the
external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 100 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0 _
B O 3 0 _
B O 4 0 _
B O 5 0 _
B O 6 0 _
B O 7 0 _
F A I L 0 _
 Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

 Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix C with
monitoring jacks A and B.
 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
1 0 0 1 _
 Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
 101 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of current and voltage waveforms: Oscillograph display
 Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via Ethernet LAN networks using a remote PC as shown in Figure 4.4.1.
TCP/IP
(LAN cable) HUB
TO
IN
TAL V TO
IN
TAL V
TE TE
RE RE
SHI
SER
R
AR
I SHI
SER
R
AR
I
ST ST
SE SE
BA
AVIC
B0V
IM EENE
C
BA
AVIC
B0V
IM EENE
C
IN IN
T T
E TE E TE
P NWA P NWA
G G
Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System
 102 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRD130 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
 Measurand data: voltage, frequency
 Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors
1.2 and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication

GRD130 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard. Station bus
communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within
substation control and automation systems via Ethernet LAN.
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC
61850 communication.
Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network
 103 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.7 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. This can be
selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to
PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or
“OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising
is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if
the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie
the number of seconds is incremented).
n sec (n+1) sec

500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected
"RSM" in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the
relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
 104 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix F shows the case outline.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.
CAUTION
 Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
 Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
 Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
 Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
 Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
 105 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried

out in a Special Handling Area.
5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
 106 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRD130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to
avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which
circuits function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
Reclosing circuit test
 107 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and
attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
 Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
 108 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source
1 Three-phase voltage source
1 DC power supply
3 Phase angle meter
3 AC ammeter
3 AC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 109 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current and
voltage sources are required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole
screen.
LED display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in
red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)
VIEW and RESET keys
 Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering"
screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
 Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Other operation keys
 Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen. Press
the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Repeat this for all keys.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
 110 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GRD130
TB2 - A1
BI1
- B1 BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
- A8 BI7
BI8
- B8
DC  TB 2 - A9
power
supply  - B9
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
 Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at
once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 0 _
B O 2 0 _
B O 3 0 _
B O 4 0 _
B O 5 0 _
B O 6 0 _
B O 7 0 _
F A I L 0 _
 111 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and
verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
GRD130
V
TB1 -1
Single-phase
voltage -2
source -3
-4
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
(a) Testing Circuit for Model 210

GRD130
V
TB1
-1 VA
Three-phase -2
voltage -3 VB
source
-4
-5 VC
-6
V
Single-phase -7
voltage
source -8
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
(b) Testing Circuit for Model 410
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.
 112 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
"Set. (view)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen

If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
 Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.
 113 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.5 Function Test

CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
4 8 _
When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for logic
level "0".
CAUTION
 Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
 Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
 Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] and [APPLVES] settings are selected “3P”
and “3PV”.
Note: Operating time test of measuring relay elements at monitoring jack A or B is not
including the operation of binary output. Whole the operating time test, if required,
should be measured at a binary output relay.
 114 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements

GRD13
V 0
 TB2
Variable- -(*)

 A
Voltage source -(*) Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB2 -A9
DC 
power
supply  -B9

DC 
voltmeter
0V
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit
The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element Signal No.
OV11 51
OV2-1 54
OV3-1 57
OV4-1 518
UV1-1 60
UV2-1 63
UV3-1 66
UV4-1 528
ZOV1 93
ZOV2 94
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, OV4, ZOV1, ZOV2

 Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.
 Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3, UV4

 Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.
 Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  5% of the setting.
Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZOV1 IDMT curves

 Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
 115 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
operating time.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in
Section 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.
6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvoltage element NOV1 and NOV2

GRD130
V
Va TB2 -A1
Three-phase Vb
Voltage -B1
source
Vc
-A2
VN
-B2
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
DC 
voltmeter
0V
Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
NOV1 95
NOV2 96
Section 6.5.1.
 Apply the three-phase balance voltage and the operating voltage value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating time check of NOV1 IDMT curve

 Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in
Section 2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.
 116 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements

GRD130
V f TB2
 -A1 A
Variable- Monitoring
Frequency /
 -B2 jack
Voltage source 0V
DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  -B9

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit

Frequency elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element Signal No.
FRQ1 218
FRQ2 219
FRQ3 220
FRQ4 221
FRQBLK 222
Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4

Section 6.5.1.
 Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.
In case of overfrequency characteristic,
 Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.
In case of underfrequency characteristics,
 Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that
the measured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.
Undervoltage block test, FRQBLK

 Apply a rated voltage and change the magnitude of frequency to operate an element.
 Keep the frequency that the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage
applied from the rated voltage to less than FRQBLK setting voltage. And then, check that
the element resets.
 117 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.5.1.4 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements

GRD130
V f
 TB2 -A1
Single-phase VL
voltage  -B2
source
V f
 -A3 VB
Single-phase
A
voltage  -B3 Monitoring
source jack
0V

DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  -B9

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.4 Operating Voltage Value Test Circuit
Voltage and synchronism check elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element Signal No.
OVB 534
UVB 536
OVL 533
UVL 535
SYN 532
Voltage check element OVB, UVB, OVL

 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number for the Term A line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.4.

OVB and UVB :
 Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB2-A3 and -B3 and measure the
value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within  5% of the
setting.
OVL and UVL :
 Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB-A1 and –B2 and measure the
value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within  5% of the
setting.
 118 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Synchronism check element SYN

 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number 532 for the TermA line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER
key.
 Apply rated voltages VB and VL as shown Figure 6.5.4.
Voltage check:
 Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set the voltage to any value over the SYNOV setting. (The
default setting of SYNOV is 51 V.)
Whilst keeping VL in-phase with VB, increase the single-phase voltage VL from zero volts.
Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage is
within  5% of the SYNUV setting.
 Further increase VL and measure the voltage at that the element resets. Check that the
measured voltage is within 5% of the SYNOV setting.
 To check the SYNDV detector, set the VB to a fixed value and increase the VL from zero
volts. Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that | VL  VB| is within 
5% of the SYNDV setting.
Phase angle check:
 Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set VB and VL to any value between the SYNOV and
SYNUV settings keeping VB in-phase with VL. Then the SYN element operates.
 Shift the angle of VL from that of VB, and measure the angle at which the element resets.
 Check that the measured angle is within 5 of the SYN setting. (The default setting of
SYN is 30°.)
 Change VB and VL, and repeat the above.
Frequency difference check:
 Set the [DfEN] to "ON", and set VB and VL to a rated voltage and rated frequency. Then
the SYN element operates.
 Shift the frequency of VL and measure the frequency at which the element resets.
 Check that |(frequency of VL)  (frequency of VB)| is within 5% of the SYNDf setting.
(The default setting of SYNDf is 1.00Hz.)
 119 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays after a simulated fault occurs.
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix D. There are internal events and external events by
binary input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the
status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input
circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record"
screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
 120 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system
voltage and their phase angle with the metering displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
V a    .   k V
   .  
V b    .   k V
   .  
V c    .   k V
   .  
V e s    .   k V
   .  
V a b    .   k V
   .  
V b c    .   k V
   .  
V c a    .   k V
   .  
V 1    .   k V
   .  
V 2    .   k V
   .  
V 0    .   k V
   .  
f   .   H z
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 0 _
B O 2 0 _
B O 3 0 _
B O 4 0 _
 121 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
B O 5 0 _
B O 6 0 _
B O 7 0 _
F A I L 0 _
 Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Repeat the above for BOs.
 122 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message Failure location
CB or
Relay Unit AC cable PLC, IEC61850 data
cable
Err: SUM (Flash memory)
Err: ROM (ROM data)
Err: RAM (SRAM)
Err: CPU (CPU)
Err: Invalid 
Err: NMI 
Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)
Err: EEP (EEPROM)
Err: A/D (A/D converter)
Err: SP (Sampling)
Err: DC (DC power supply circuit)
Err: TC (Tripping circuit)(1)  (2)
Err: V0, Err: V2  (AC input circuit)(1)  (2)
Err: CB  (Circuit breaker)(1)  (2)
Err: PLC (PLC data)
Err: MAP (IEC61850 mapping data)
Err: RTC (SNTP setting)
Err: LAN (Ethernet LAN)
Err: GOOSE (GOOSE subscribe)
Err: Ping (Ping response)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
 123 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level
is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section
4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Disconnect the trip outputs.
 Short-circuit all AC current inputs. Open all AC voltage inputs.
 Unscrew the relay front cover.
 Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
 To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you.
(See Figure 6.7.1.)
 Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:
 Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
 Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.
 Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number
when inserting the relay unit.
 124 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
IN SERVICE IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW TRIP VIEW
ALARM ALARM
RESET RESET
A B 0V CAN ENTER A B 0V CAN ENTER

CEL CEL
END END
Handle
Pull up handle
Bind screw
Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit

Front view Front view
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
 Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
 Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 125 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
 Check that all the external connections are correct.
 Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
 Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Alarm view"
screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
 126 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix A
Signal List
 127 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
No. SIGNAL NAME Contents
0 CONSTANT_0 constant 0
1 CONSTANT_1 constant 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39 OV1-1_INST OV1-1 relay element start
42
43
44
48
49
50
51 OV1-1 OV1-1 relay element output
60 UV1-1 UV1-1 relay element output
69
70
 128 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93 ZOV1 ZOV1 relay element ouput
94 ZOV2 ZOV2 relay element ouput
95 NOV1 NOV1 relay element ouput
96 NOV2 NOV2 relay element ouput
97 UVBLK UV blocked element operating
98
99
100
101 OV1_TRIP OV1 trip command
102 OV1-1_TRIP OV1 trip command(Phase-1)
105
106
107
112
113
114
119
120
121
122 UV1_TRIP UV1 trip command
123 UV1-1_TRIP UV1 trip command(Phase-1)
126
127
128
133
134
135
140
 129 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
141
142
143 ZOV1_TRIP ZOV1 trip command
144 ZOV2_ALARM ZOV2 alarm command
145 NOV1_TRIP NOV1 trip command
146 NOV2_ALARM NOV2 alarm command
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157 UV1-1_INST UV1-1 relay element start
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197 ZOV1_INST ZOV1 relay element start
198 ZOV2_INST ZOV2 relay element start
199 NOV1_INST NOV1 relay element start
200 NOV2_INST NOV2 relay element start
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
 130 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218 FRQ1 FRQ1 relay element ouput
222 FRQBLK FRQ blocked element operating
223
224
225 DFRQ1 DFRQ1 relay element ouput
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248 ZOV_DIST ZOV relay for disturbance record
249 NOV_DIST NOV relay for disturbance record
250 OV-1_DIST OV-1 relay for disturbance record
253 UV-1_DIST UV-1 relay for disturbance record
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
 131 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
 132 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
351
352
353
354
355 FRQ_TRIP FRQ trip command
356 FRQ1_TRIP FRQ1 trip command
360 DFRQ1_TRIP DFRQ1 trip command
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371 GEN.TRIP General trip command
372 GEN.TRIP-1 General trip command (1 Phase)
375 GEN.TRIP-N General trip command (N Phase)
376
377
378
379
380 GEN.ALARM General alarm command
381 GEN.ALARM-1 General alarm command (1 Phase)
384 GEN.ALARM-N General alarm command (N Phase)
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412 VCHK Voltage check for ARC
413 VCHK_SYN ditto
414 VCHK_LBDL ditto
415 VCHK_DBLL ditto
416 VCHK_DBDL ditto
417
418
419
420
 133 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435 OV4_ALARM OV4 alarm command
436 OV4-1_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-1)
439
440
441
442
443 UV4_ALARM UV4 alarm command
444 UV4-1_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-1)
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456 OV1-OR OV1 relay (3PHASE OR)
460 OV1_INST-OR OV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
461 OV2_INST-OR OV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
462 UV1-OR UV1 relay (3PHASE OR)
466 UV1_INST-OR UV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
467 UV2_INST-OR UV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
468
469
470
471 BO1_OP Binary output 1
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
 134 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
531
532 SYN Voltage check relay for ARC
533 OVL ditto
534 OVB ditto
535 UVL ditto
536 UVB ditto
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550 OV1-1_RST OV1 relay element definite time reset
551 OV1-2_RST ditto
552 OV1-3_RST ditto
553 OV2-1_RST OV2 relay element definite time reset
554 OV2-2_RST ditto
555 OV2-3_RST ditto
556 UV1-1_RST UV1 relay element definite time reset
557 UV1-2_RST ditto
558 UV1-3_RST ditto
559 UV2-1_RST UV2 relay element definite time reset
560 UV2-2_RST ditto
 135 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
561 UV2-3_RST ditto
562 ZOV1_RST ZOV1 relay element definite time reset
563 ZOV2_RST ZOV2 relay element definite time reset
564 NOV1_RST NOV1 relay element definite time reset
565 NOV2_RST NOV2 relay element definite time reset
566 UVBLK-1 UV blocked element operating
567 UVBLK-2 ditto
568 UVBLK-3 ditto
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
 136 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
 137 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1
 138 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805 PICKUP_L1 A phase element pick-up for IEC103
806 PICKUP_L2 B phase element pick-up for IEC103
807 PICKUP_L3 C phase element pick-up for IEC103
808 PICKUP_N Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
 139 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
 140 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
 141 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040 FAULT_PHA_1 fault_phase_1
1043 FAULT_PHA_N fault_phase_N
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
 142 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
 143 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
 144 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked
1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode
1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active
1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE
1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
1253 AMF_OFF SV BLOCK
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258 RELAY_FAIL-A
1259
1260
 145 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1261 TRIP-H Trip signal hold
1262
1263
1264 V0_ERR_UF V0 error(unfiltered)
1265 V2_ERR_UF V2 error(unfiltered)
1266
1267
1268 V0_ERR V0 error
1269 V2_ERR V2 error
1270 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure
1271
1272 TC_ALARM Trip counter alarm
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328 GOOSE_IN_Q1 Goose Input Quality #1
 146 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1360 GOOSE_IN_1 Goose Input #1
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
 147 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1401 LOCAL_OP_ACT local operation active
1402 REMOTE_OP_ACT remote operation active
1403 NORM_LED_ON IN-SERVICE LED ON
1404 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON
1405 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON
1406 TEST_LED_ON TEST LED ON
1407
1408 PRG_LED_RESET Latched programmable LED RESET
1409 LED_RESET TRIP LED RESET
1410
1411
1412
1413 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
1414 PRG_LED1_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
1420 PROGRAMMABLE LED7 ON (reserved)
1430 LCD_IND. VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command
1431 LCD_IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
1432 LCD_IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command
1433
1434
1435 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear
1436 E.Record_CLR Event record clear
1437 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear
1438 Data_Lost Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1439 TP_COUNT_CLR Trip counter cleared
1440
1441
1442 DEMAND_CLR Demand cleared
1443
1444
1445 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change
1446 IEC103_data_CHG IEC-103 data change
1447 IEC850_data_CHG IEC-850 data change
1448 Sys.set_change System setting change
1449 Rly.set_change Relay setting change
1450 Grp.set_change Group setting change
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed)
1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed)
1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed)
1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed)
1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed)
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465 DC_supply_err DC supply error
1466 RTC_err RTC stopped
1467 PCI_err PCI bus error
1468 GOOSE_stop GOOSE stopped
1469 Ping_err Ping no anwer
1470 PLC_err PLC stopeed
 148 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC input
1471 61850_err 61850 stopped
1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error
1473 ROM_RAM_err Rom - Ram mismatch error
1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error
1475 BU_RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1476
1477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error
1478
1479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error
1480 CPU_err Program error
1481 Invalid Invalid error
1482 NMI NMI
1483 Sampling_err Sampling error
1484 DIO_err DIO card connection error
1485 LAN_err LAN error
1486 LCD_err LCD panel connection error
1487 ROM_data_err 8M Romdata error
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
 149 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ trip block command
1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK ditto
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 OV1_BLOCK OV trip block command
1585 OV2_BLOCK ditto
1588 UV1_BLOCK UV trip block command
1589 UV2_BLOCK ditto
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK ZOV trip block command
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK ditto
1594
1595
1596 NOV1_BLOCK NOV trip block command
1597 NOV2_BLOCK ditto
1598
1599
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ trip block command
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK ditto
1604
1605
 150 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628 EXT_TRIP-1 External trip commamd (1 Phase)
1631 EXT_TRIP External trip commamd
1632 TC_FAIL Trip circuit Fail Alarm commamd
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639 IND.RESET Indication reset command
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 TP_COUNT-1 Trip counter count up command
1665 TP_COUNT-2 ditto
1666 TP_COUNT-3 ditto
1667 TP_COUNT ditto
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
 151 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP Frequency scheme trip command (Stage1)
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
:
:
2550
 152 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1 Indicate the alarm display
2561 DISP.ALARM2 ditto
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK Synchronise clock commamd
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET Alarm LED set
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
 153 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1
2625 F.RECORD2 2
2626 F.RECORD3 3
2627 F.RECORD4 4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1
2633 D.RECORD2 2
2634 D.RECORD3 3
2635 D.RECORD4 4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed command (Change to group1)
2641 SET.GROUP2 2
2642 SET.GROUP3 3
2643 SET.GROUP4 4
2644 SET.GROUP5 5
2645 SET.GROUP6 6
2646 SET.GROUP7 7
2647 SET.GROUP8 8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1 User configurable trip mode in fault record
2657 CON_TPMD2 ditto
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV protection inactivate command received
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
2689
2690
 154 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
 155 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
 156 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
 157 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
 158 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
 159 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PLC output
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 160 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
For IEC61850
Measure Table
NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS

0 Va_mag Va magnitude
1 Vb_mag Vb magnitude
2 Vc_mag Vc magnitude
3 Va_ang Va angle
4 Vb_ang Vb angle
5 Vc_ang Vc angle
6 Ves_mag Ves magnitude
7 Ves_ang Ves angle
8 Vab_mag Vab magnitude
9 Vbc_mag Vbc magnitude
10 Vca_mag Vca magnitude
11 Vab_ang Vab angle
12 Vbc_ang Vbc angle
13 Vca_ang Vca angle
14 V1_mag V1 magnitude
17 V1_ang V1 angle
18 V2_ang V2 angle
19 V0_ang V0 angle
20 Freq Frequency
 161 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS 61
0 GROUP_NO number of groups 62
1 ACT_GROUP active group number 63
2 EDIT_GROUP edit group number 64
3 CHG_GROUP change active group 65
4 66
5 67
6
68
7
69
8
70
9
71
10
72
11
73
12
74
13
75
14
76
15
77
16
78
17
18 79
19 80
20 81
21 82
22 83
23 84
24 85
25 86
26 87
27 88
28 89
29 90 1A2_5A1 1A:2 5A:1
30 91 1A1_5A2 1A:1 5A:2
31 92 1A1_5A0 1A:1 5A:0
32 93 1A0_5A1 1A:0 5A:1
33 94 1A3_5A2 1A:3 5A:2
34 95
35 96
36 97
37 98
38 99
39 100 SoftType Software type
40 101 MappingName Mapping info
41
102 Vendor venfor name
42
103
43
104
44
105
45
106
46
107
47
108
48
109
49
110 Const0 Always 0
50
111 Const1 Always 1
51
112 Const2 Always 2
52
53 113 Const3 Always 3
54 114
55 115
56 116
57 117
58 118
59 119
60
 162 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Status Table
NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS

0 GOOSE_V_001 GOOSE_Value_001 51 GOOSE_V_052 GOOSE_Value_052
 163 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

101 GOOSE_V_102 GOOSE_Value_102 151
126 GOOSE_V_127 GOOSE_Value_127 176 DIRMODE_OC1 DIRMODE_OC1
127 GOOSE_V_128 GOOSE_Value_128 177 DIRMODE_OC2 DIRMODE_OC2
128 XCBR_POS0 XCBR_POS0 178 DIRMODE_OC3 DIRMODE_OC3
129 179 DIRMODE_OC4 DIRMODE_OC4
130 180 DIRMODE_EF1 DIRMODE_EF1
134 184 DIRMODE_SEF1 DIRMODE_SEF1
135 LEDRST_EXEC LEDRST_EXEC 185 DIRMODE_SEF2 DIRMODE_SEF2
136 RREC1 RREC1 186 DIRMODE_SEF3 DIRMODE_SEF3
137 187 DIRMODE_SEF4 DIRMODE_SEF4
138 188 DIRMODE_NOC1 DIRMODE_NOC1
139 XCBR_OPCNT0 XCBR_OPCNT0 189 DIRMODE_NOC2 DIRMODE_NOC2
140 190
141 191
142 192
143 193
144 194
145 195
146 196
147 197
148 198
149 199
150 HEALTH HEALTH 200 MOD_001 IEC-MODE_001
 164 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

201 MOD_002 IEC-MODE_002 251 MOD_052 IEC-MODE_052
250 MOD_051 IEC-MODE_051 300 BEH_001 IEC-Behavier_001
 165 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

301 BEH_002 IEC-Behavier_002 351 BEH_052 IEC-Behavier_052
350 BEH_051 IEC-Behavier_051 400 Const0 Const0
 166 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

401 Const1 Const1 451
406 456
407 457
408 458
409 459
410 460
411 461
412 462
413 463
414 464
415 465
416 466
417 467
418 468
419 469
420 470
421 471
422 472
423 473
424 474
425 475
426 476
427 477
428 478
429 479
430 480
431 481
432 482
433 483
434 484
435 485
436 486
437 487
438 488
439 489
440 490
441 491
442 492
443 493
444 494
445 495
446 496
447 497
448 498
449 499
450
 167 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Control Table

0 LEDRST_SIG LED Reset
1 LEDRST_ORCAT Control - LED Reset Originator category
2 LEDRST_ORID Control - LED Reset Originator category
3 LEDRST_ORCAT_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category
4 LEDRST_ORID_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category
5 RESERVE Reserve
6 RESERVE Reserve
7 RESERVE Reserve
8 RESERVE Reserve
9 RESERVE Reserve
10 MOD_CHECK MOD_CHECK
11 MOD_CTLNUM MOD_CTLNUM
12 MOD_CTLVAL MOD_CTLVAL
13 MOD_ORCAT MOD_ORCAT
14 MOD_ORIDENT MOD_ORIDENT
15 MOD_TEST MOD_TEST
16 MOD_CTLMDL MOD_CTLMDL
17 MOD_ST_ORCAT MOD_ST_ORCAT
18 MOD_ST_ORIDENT MOD_ST_ORIDENT
19 MOD_SELECT MOD_SELECT
20 MOD_SBOTIMEOUT MOD_SBOTIMEOUT
21 MOD_SBOCLASS MOD_SBOCLASS
 168 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix B
Event Record Items
 169 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Event record
Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type
210D 410D
1 EV1 0 - 3071 -- Event record signal 768 BI1 command x On/Off
2 EV2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 769 BI2 command x On/Off
9 EV9 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1639 Ind reset x On/Off
10 EV10 0 - 3071 -- ditto 371 GEN trip x On/Off
11 EV11 0 - 3071 -- ditto 380 GEN alarm x On/Off
12 EV12 0 - 3071 -- ditto 355 FRQ trip x On/Off
13 EV13 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
14 EV14 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
15 EV15 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
16 EV16 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
17 EV17 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
18 EV18 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
19 EV19 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
20 EV20 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
21 EV21 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
22 EV22 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
23 EV23 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
24 EV24 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1251 Relay fail x On/Off
25 EV25 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
26 EV26 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1268 V0 err x On/Off
27 EV27 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1269 V2 err x On/Off
28 EV28 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1270 TCSV x On/Off
29 EV29 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
30 EV30 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
31 EV31 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
32 EV32 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
33 EV33 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
34 EV34 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
35 EV35 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
36 EV36 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
37 EV37 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
38 EV38 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
39 EV39 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
40 EV40 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
41 EV41 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
42 EV42 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
43 EV43 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
44 EV44 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
45 EV45 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
46 EV46 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
47 EV47 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
48 EV48 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
49 EV49 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1258 Ry fail-A x On/Off
50 EV50 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1438 Data lost x On/Off
51 EV51 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
52 EV52 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
53 EV53 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
54 EV54 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
55 EV55 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
56 EV56 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
57 EV57 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
58 EV58 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
59 EV59 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
60 EV60 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
61 EV61 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
62 EV62 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
63 EV63 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
64 EV64 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
 170 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Event record
Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type
210D 410D
65 EV65 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
66 EV66 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
67 EV67 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
68 EV68 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
69 EV69 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
70 EV70 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
71 EV71 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
72 EV72 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
73 EV73 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
74 EV74 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
75 EV75 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
76 EV76 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
77 EV77 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
78 EV78 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
79 EV79 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
80 EV80 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
81 EV81 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
82 EV82 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
83 EV83 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
84 EV84 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
85 EV85 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
86 EV86 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
87 EV87 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
88 EV88 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
89 EV89 0 - 3071 -- ditto 471 BO1 operate x On/Off
96 EV96 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
97 EV97 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
98 EV98 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
99 EV99 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
100 EV100 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off
101 EV101 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2640 SET.GROUP1 x On
109 EV109 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1448 Sys. change x On
110 EV110 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1449 Rly. change x On
111 EV111 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1450 Grp. change x On
112 EV112 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
113 EV113 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1272 TC alarm x On
114 EV114 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
115 EV115 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
116 EV116 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
117 EV117 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
118 EV118 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
119 EV119 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1445 PLC data CHG x On
120 EV120 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
121 EV121 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1409 LED RST x On
122 EV122 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1435 F.record_CLR x On
123 EV123 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1436 E.record_CLR x On
124 EV124 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1437 D.record_CLR x On
125 EV125 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1439 TP_COUNT_CLR x On
126 EV126 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
127 EV127 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On
128 EV128 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1442 DEMAND_CLR x On
 171 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 172 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List
 173 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Setting Default Setting

Device Range Unit Contents 210 410
Name Setting Signal Name Setting Signal Name
BO1 Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --
Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --
In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 122 UV1_TRIP 122 UV1_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 143 ZOV1_TRIP 143 ZOV1_TRIP
In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --
 174 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
 175 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Test
/1 Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter
/2 F.record /3 F.record /4 F.record #1

Display 16/Jul/2002
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.031
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 E.record /3 E.record
Display
Clear 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section OV1 trip On
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 D.record /3 D.record
Display
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
 176 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter /3 Counter
Display Trips ******
Clear Trips TripsA ******
Clear Trips A TripsB ******
Clear Trips B TripsC ******
Clear Trips C
Refer to Section Clear Trips?
4.2.3.4.
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
 177 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering /3 Metering

Metering Metering Va **.** kV
Binary I/O Demand
Relay element /3 Demand
/2 Binary I/O Vamax **.** kV
Time sync.
IP [0000 0000]
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
/2 Ry element
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
OV#1[000000000]
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 12/Nov/2002
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P Refer to Section 4.2.5
LED
/2 Version GRD130-210D-10
Relay type -A0
Serial No.
Software 

/2 Description GSPDM1-03-*
Plant name
Description
/2 Comms /3 Addr./Param.
Addr./Param. IEC 2
Switch
/3 Switch
a-1, b-1
 178 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-1
/4 Signal No.
/2 Record BITRN 100
E.record /3 E.record
D.record Signal No. /4 Event name
Counter Event name
/3 D.record /4 Time/starter
Time/starter Time 2.0s
Scheme sw
/4 Scheme sw
Binary sig.
Signal name
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1 
/4 Signal name
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Metering TCALM 10000
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
Time zone
/3 Time zone
GMT +9hrs
/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
:
Group8
/3 Common
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
 179 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Parameter 
Line name 
VT ratio
/5 VT ratio
PVT 100
VESVT 100
/4 Trip /5 Scheme sw /6 OV
Scheme sw OV
Prot. element UV
ZOV /6 UV
NOV
FRQ
SYN /6 ZOV
/6 NOV
/6 FRQ
/6 SYN
/3 Group2
Parameter
/5 Prot.element /6 OV
/3 Group8
OV
Parameter
UV
ZOV /6 UV
NOV
FRQ
SYN /6 ZOV
/2 Binary I/P /4 Timers

/6 NOV
Timers
Functions
/4 Functions
/6 FRQ
/6 SYN
a-1 b-1
 180 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-1
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, D
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1005
BO2 AND, DL
, , 
:
BO7 OR, L
, , 
BO1TBO 0.20s
:
BO7TBO 0.20s
/2 LED /3 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1
IND1 BIT1 I,O
IND2
/1 Set.(change) /4 IND2
Password BIT1 I,O
Description : Password trap
Comms Password [_ ]
Record 1234567890
Status
: Confirmation trap
Protection
Change settings?
Binary I/P
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
Binary O/P
LED
/2 Password Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]

Setting 1234567890 1234567890
Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.
Test
/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Alarm1 Text ABCDEFG
:
Alarm4 Text
a-1 b-2
 181 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-2
/3 Addr./Param.
/2 Comms
Addr./Param.
/3 Switch
Switch
/2 Record /3 E.record
E.record
D.record BITRN
Counter 100 _ /4 Time/starter
Refer to Section
:
4.2.6.5.
/3 D.record /4 Scheme sw
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Copy gp. Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
:
Group8
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
 182 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
/4 Common
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
/5 Parameter _ /7 OV
Line name ABCDEFG
VT ratio
/6 VT ratio /7 UV
/5 Trip /6 Scheme sw /7 ZOV

Scheme sw OV
Prot.element UV
ZOV /7 NOV
NOV
FRQ
SYN /7 FRQ
/7 SYN
/6 Prot.element /7 OV
OV
UV
ZOV /7 UV
NOV
FRQ
SYN /7 ZOV
/7 NOV
/4 Group2
Parameter
/7 FRQ
/4 Group8
Parameter
/7 SYN
a-1, b-2 c-2
 183 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 b-2 c-2
/3 Copy A to B
A _
B _
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI1 /4 Timers

BI1 Timers
BI2 Functions
BI3 /4 Functions
BI4
BI5
BI6 /3 BI8
BI7 Timers
BI8 Functions
Refer to Section
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO1 /4 Logic/Reset

BO1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Functions
BO7
Refer to Section /3 BO7
4.2.6.9. Logic/Reset
Functions
/2 LED
LED
Refer to Section
Virtual LED 4.2.6.10.
/3 LED /4 LED1 /5 Logic/Reset

LED1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/5 Functions
LED6
/4 LED6
Logic/Reset
Functions
a-1 c-3
 184 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
a-1 c-3
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1 /5 Reset

IND1 Reset
IND2 Functions
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/1 Test /2 Switch
Switch
Binary O/P A.M.F. 1 _
Logic circuit Off/On
Refer to Section 4.2.7. UVTST 0
Off/On
: Password trap IECTST 0
Password [_ ] Off/On
1234567890
/2 Binary O/P Operate?

ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1 0 _
Disable/Enable
FAIL 0
Disable/Enable
/2 Logic
circuit
TermA
1 _
TermB
1001 _
1
 185 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
NORMAL
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
(DISPLAY OFF)
1=RECORD
PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR MENU 1=FAULT RECORD
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON )
"RESET"
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD
METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON ) 4=COUNTER
2=STATUS
VIEW RESET
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT
METERING 5 AUTO- 3=RELAY ELELMENT

( DISPLAY ON )
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT * AUTO-
( DISPLAY ON ) 3=COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
9=LED
( DISPLAY ON )
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT
 186 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix E
Case Outline
 187 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
IN SERVICE
TRIP VIEW
ALARM
25 8
RESET
A B 0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END
15.6 185.2 32
104
Side view
Front view
4 holes-5.5
4 holes-4.5
TB3 OPT R
TB1 T
TB3
TB1
TB2
TB2
24 9
23 9
T1
F1
R
T
E E
Rear view for 56

Rear view for
RS485 + 100BASE-TX Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX 102
Panel cut-out
TB3
TB1
A1 B1 Terminal Application
1 2
3 4 TB3: A1 – A3 RS485 I/F
5 6 TB3: B1 – B2 IRIG-B
7 8 OPT Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103
T1 100BASE-TX
TB2
A1 B1 F1 100BASE-FX
TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal (M3.5 Ring)

T1: RJ45
A10 B10 OPT: ST connector

F1: SC connector
A18 B18
Terminal block
Case Outline
 188 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix F
Typical External Connection
 189 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GRD130 - 210 (1PN setting)
A B C TB3-
B4
A4
BO1
TB1- A5
1 B5
2 VY
A7
3
4 VN BO2
B7
A6
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2-
B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1 TB3-A2
COM-A
DD FAIL.
TB2- A9 +5Vdc A1
DC (+) COM-B
SUPPLY DC-DC RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
(-) B9
0V A3
COM-0V
A10 Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
OPT T
() B10 R
FRAME EARTH
E TX Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)
CASE EARTH
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)
FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
()This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.
 190 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GRD130 - 210 (1PP setting)
A B C TB3-
B4
A4
BO1
TB1- A5
1 B5
2 V
A7
3
4 VN BO2
B7
A6
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2-
B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL. TB3-A2
COM-A
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+) A1
SUPPLY DC-DC COM-B
(-) B9
0V RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
A3
COM-0V
A10
() B10 T Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
OPT
FRAME EARTH R
E
CASE EARTH Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
 191 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
TB3-
B4
A4
A B C BO1
TB1- A5
1 B5
2 VAB
A7
3
4 VBC BO2
B7
A6
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1 COM-A
TB3-A2
DD FAIL.
TB2- A9 +5Vdc A1
DC (+) COM-B
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
0V
A3
COM-0V
A10
T Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
B10 OPT
() R
FRAME EARTH
CASE EARTH
FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
 192 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GRD130 - 410 (3PN setting)
TB3-
TB1- B4
A B C
1 A4
BO1
2 VA A5
3 B5
4 VB
5 A7
6 VC B7
7 BO2
A6
8 VN
B6
B8
FRAME EARTH
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL. TB3-A2
COM-A
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+)
DC-DC A1
SUPPLY B9 COM-B
(-) 0V
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
A3
A10 COM-0V
() B10 T Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

OPT
FRAME EARTH R
E
CASE EARTH
TX Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)

FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
 193 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
TB3-
A B C
TB1- B4
1 B4
A4
2 VAB BO1
A5
3
4 VBC B5
5 A7
6 VCA B7
7 BO2
8 VN A6
B6
FRAME EARTH B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL. TB3-A2
COM-A
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+)
DC-DC A1
SUPPLY B9 COM-B
(-) 0V
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
A3
A10 COM-0V
() B10 Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

OPT T
FRAME EARTH R
E
CASE EARTH
TX Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)

FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
 194 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
TB3-
A B C
TB1- B4
1 B4
A4
1
2 VAB BO1
A5
3
4 VBC B5
5 A7
6 VCA B7
7 BO2
8 VN A6
B6
FRAME EARTH B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND A1 BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1 COM-A
TB3-A2
DD FAIL.
TB2- A9 +5Vdc A1
DC (+) COM-B
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
0V
A3
COM-0V
A10
T Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
B10 OPT
() R
FRAME EARTH
CASE EARTH
FX
TB3-B2
B1 IRIG-B
 195 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 196 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix G
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 197 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC voltage
DC supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Line parameter
VT ratio PVT: RVT:
3. Contacts setting
TB3 Terminal A5(B5)-B4, A4
Terminal A6(B6)-A7, B7
Terminal A9(B9)-B8, A8
Terminal B16-A16
 198 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4. Relay setting sheet

Default Setting of Relay Series
Range
№ Setting Device Name Units Contents Model User setting
210 410
1 Active group 1-8 － Active setting group 1
1PP - 1PN - 2PP － Application setting of VT(200) 1PP --
2 APPL
3PN - 3PP - 2PP Application setting of VT(400) -- 3PN
3 APPLVES Off - Ve - Vs － Application setting of VT-Ves Ve
4 V0SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － ditto -- ALM
5 V2SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － ditto Off ALM
6 AOLED Off - On － TRIP LED lighting control at alarm output On
7 Line name Specified by user － Line name no-name
8 PVT 1 - 20000 － Phase VT ratio 100
9 VESVT 1 - 20000 － Ve's VT ratio 100
10 OV OV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV1 Enable Off
11 OV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV2 Enable Off
12 OV3EN Off - On － OV3 Enable Off
13 OV4EN Off - On － OV4 Enable Off
14 UV UV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV1 Enable DT
15 UV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV2 Enable Off
16 UV3EN Off - On － UV3 Enable Off
17 UV4EN Off - On － UV4 Enable Off
18 VBLKEN Off - On － UV Block Enable Off
19 ZOV ZOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV1 Enable DT
20 ZOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV2 Enable Off
21 NOV NOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV1 Enable Off
22 NOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV2 Enable Off
23 FRQ FRQ1EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ1 Enable Off
24 FRQ2EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ2 Enable Off
27 DFRQ DFRQ1EN Off - R - D － DFRQ1 Enable Off
28 DFRQ2EN Off - R - D － DFRQ2 Enable Off
31 OV OV1 10.0 - 200.0 V OV1 Threshold setting 120.0
32 TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s OV1 Definite time setting 1.00
33 TOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV1 Time multiplier setting 1.00
34 TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0
35 OV1DPR 10 - 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95
36 OV2 10.0 - 200.0 V OV2 Threshold setting 140.0
38 TOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV2 Time multiplier setting 1.00
39 TOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0
47 OV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 1.00
48 OV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
49 OV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
50 OV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 1.00
51 OV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
52 OV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
53 UV UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 Threshold setting 60.0
54 TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s UV1 Definite time setting 1.00
55 TUV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV1 Time multiplier setting 1.00
56 TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0
57 UV2 5.0 - 130.0 V UV2 Threshold setting 40.0
59 TUV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV2 Time multiplier setting 1.00
60 TUV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0
65 VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UV Blocking threshold 10.0
66 UV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 1.00
67 UV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
68 UV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
69 UV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 1.00
70 UV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
71 UV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
 199 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Range
210 410
72 ZOV ZOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV1 Threshold setting 20.0
73 TZOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV1 Definite time setting 1.00
74 TZOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV1 Time multiplier setting 1.00
75 TZOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0
76 ZOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV2 Threshold setting 40.0
77 TZOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV2 Definite time setting 1.00
78 TZOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 1.00
79 TZOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0
80 ZOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1 1.00
81 ZOV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
82 ZOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
83 ZOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2 1.00
84 ZOV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
85 ZOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
86 NOV NOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV1 Threshold setting 20.0
87 TNOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV1 Definite time setting 1.00
88 TNOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV1 Time multiplier setting 1.00
89 TNOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0
90 NOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV2 Threshold setting 40.0
91 TNOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV2 Definite time setting 1.00
92 TNOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV2 Time multiplier setting 1.00
93 TNOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0
94 NOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1 1.00
95 NOV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
96 NOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
97 NOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2 1.00
98 NOV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00
99 NOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000
100 FRQ FRQ1 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ1 Threshold setting -1.00
101 TFRQ1 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ1 Definite time setting 1.00
102 FRQ2 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ2 Threshold setting -1.00
108 FVBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V UV Blocking threshold 40.0
109 DFRQ DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ1 Threshold setting. 0.5
110 DFRQ2 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ2 Threshold setting. 0.5
113 SYN VCHK Off - LD - DL - DD - S － Autoreclosing volatge check Off
114 DfEN Off - On － Frequency difference checking enable Off
115 VTPHSEL A-B-C － VT phase selection A
116 VT-RATE PH-G - PH-PH － VT rating PH-G
117 VES-RATE PH-G - PH-PH － VES rating PH-G
118 3PH-VT Bus - Line － 3ph. VT location Line
119 OVB 10 - 150 V OV element of bus-voltage check 51
120 UVB 10 - 150 V UV element of bus-voltage check 13
121 OVL 10 - 150 V OV element of line-voltage check 51
122 UVL 10 - 150 V UV element of line-voltage check 13
123 SYNUV 10 - 150 V UV element of Synchro. check 83
124 SYNOV 10 - 150 V OV element of Synchro. check 51
125 SYNDV 0 - 150 V Voltage difference for SYN 150
126 SYNθ 5 - 75 deg Synchro. check (ph. diff.) 30
127 SYNDf 0.01 - 2.00 Hz Frequency difference checking for SYN 1.00
128 TSYN 0.01 - 10.00 s Synchronism check timer (Live-bus & Live-line) 1.00
129 TLBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Live-bus & Dead-line) 0.05
130 TDBLL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Live-line) 0.05
131 TDBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Dead-line) 0.05
132 BI1 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
133 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00
134 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm
 200 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Range
210 410
156 LED1 Logic OR - AND － LED1 Logic Gate Type OR
157 Reset Inst - Latch － LED1 Reset operation Inst
158 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED1 Functions 0
159 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
160 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
161 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
164 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED2 Functions 0
165 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
166 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
167 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
170 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED3 Functions 0
171 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
172 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
173 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
176 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED4 Functions 0
177 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
178 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
179 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
182 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED5 Functions 0
183 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
184 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
185 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
188 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED6 Functions 0
189 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
190 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
191 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
192 IND1 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED1 Reset operation Inst
193 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED1 Functions 0
194 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
195 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
196 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
197 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
198 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
199 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
200 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
201 IND2 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED2 Reset operation Inst
202 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED2 Functions 0
203 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
204 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
205 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
206 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
207 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
208 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
209 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0
210 Plant name Specified by user － Plant name no-name
211 Description ditto － Memorandum for user no-data
212 Alarm1 Text Specified by user － Alarm1 Text ALARM1
 201 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Range
210 410
216 IEC 0 - 254 － Station address for IEC103 2
217 SYADJ -9999 - 9999 ms Time sync. Compensation 0
218 IP1-1 0 - 254 － CH1 IP address 192
219 IP1-2 0 - 254 － 168
220 IP1-3 0 - 254 － 19
221 IP1-4 0 - 254 － 172
222 SM1-1 0 - 255 － CH1 Subnet mask 255
223 SM1-2 0 - 255 － 255
224 SM1-3 0 - 255 － 255
225 SM1-4 0 - 255 － 0
226 GW1-1 0 - 254 － CH1 Gateway 192
227 GW1-2 0 - 254 － 168
228 GW1-3 0 - 254 － 19
229 GW1-4 0 - 254 － 1
230 IP2-1 0 - 254 － IP Address of CH#2 192
231 IP2-2 0 - 254 － 168
232 IP2-3 0 - 254 － 19
233 IP2-4 0 - 254 － 173
234 SM2-1 0 - 255 － Subnet Mask of CH#2 255
235 SM2-2 0 - 255 － 255
236 SM2-3 0 - 255 － 255
237 SM2-4 0 - 255 － 0
238 GW2-1 0 - 254 － Gateway Address of CH#2 192
239 GW2-2 0 - 254 － 168
240 GW2-3 0 - 254 － 19
241 GW2-4 0 - 254 － 1
242 SI1-1 0 - 254 － SNTP Server1 Address 0
243 SI1-2 0 - 254 － 0
244 SI1-3 0 - 254 － 0
245 SI1-4 0 - 254 － 0
247 SI2-2 0 - 254 － 0
248 SI2-3 0 - 254 － 0
249 SI2-4 0 - 254 － 0
251 SI3-2 0 - 254 － 0
252 SI3-3 0 - 254 － 0
253 SI3-4 0 - 254 － 0
255 SI4-2 0 - 254 － 0
256 SI4-3 0 - 254 － 0
257 SI4-4 0 - 254 － 0
258 SMODE 0-1 － 0
259 DEADT 1 - 120 min TCP KeepAlive Time 120
260 GOINT 1 - 60 s 60
261 PG1-1 0 - 254 － Ping check addrs port#1 0
262 PG1-2 0 - 254 － 0
263 PG1-3 0 - 254 － 0
264 PG1-4 0 - 254 － 0
265 PG2-1 0 - 254 － Ping check addrs port#2 0
266 PG2-2 0 - 254 － 0
267 PG2-3 0 - 254 － 0
268 PG2-4 0 - 254 － 0
269 232C 9.6 - 19.2 - 57.6 － RS-232C baud rate 9.6
270 IECBR 9.6 - 19.2 － IEC103 baud rate 19.2
271 IECBLK Normal - Blocked － Monitor direction blocked Normal
272 850BLK Normal - Blocked － IEC61850 Block Normal
273 850AUT Off - On － IEC61850 Authorize Off
274 TSTMOD Off - On － IEC61850 Test mode Off
275 GSECHK Off - On － GOOSE receive check Off
276 PINGCHK Off - On － Ping check Off
277 BITRN 0 - 128 － Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events 100
278 Time 0.1 - 5.0 s Disturbance record 2.0
279 OV 10.0 - 200.0 V ditto 120.0
280 UV 1.0 - 130.0 V ditto 60.0
281 ZOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0
282 NOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0
283 TRIP Off - On － Disturbance record trigger use or not On
284 OV Off - On － ditto On
285 UV Off - On － ditto On
286 ZOV Off - On － ditto On
287 NOV Off - On － ditto On
 202 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Def ault Setting of Relay Series

Range
№ Setting Dev ice Name Units Contents Model User setting
210 410
288 TCSPEN Of f - On － Trip Circuit Superv ision Enable Of f
289 TCAEN Of f - On － Trip CounterAlarm Enable Of f
290 TCALM 1 - 10000 － Trip Count Alarm Threshold 10000
291 Display Prim. - Second. － Metering Prim.
292 Time sy nc Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN － Time sy nc. Of
293 GMT -12 - +12 hrs Time 0
294 GMTm -59 - +59 min Time 0
 203 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
5. PLC default setting
Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop

Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn -- Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK
1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK
1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK
1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 OV1_BLOCK
1585 OV2_BLOCK
1586 OV3_BLOCK
1587 OV4_BLOCK
1588 UV1_BLOCK
1589 UV2_BLOCK
1590 UV3_BLOCK
1591 UV4_BLOCK
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK
1594
1595
1596 NOV1_BLOCK
1597 NOV2_BLOCK
1598
1599
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK
1602 FRQ3_BLOCK
1603 FRQ4_BLOCK
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
 204 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628 EXT_TRIP-A
1629 EXT_TRIP-B
1630 EXT_TRIP-C
1631 EXT_TRIP
1632 TC_FAIL
1633 CB_N/O_CONT X [769]BI2_COMMAND X
1634 CB_N/C_CONT X [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639 IND.RESET X [768]BI1_COMMAND X
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 TP_COUNT-A
1665 TP_COUNT-B
1666 TP_COUNT-C
1667 TP_COUNT X [371]GEN.TRIP X
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP
1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP
1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP
1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP
1684
1685
 205 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
 206 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
 207 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
 208 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
 209 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
 210 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
 211 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
 212 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
 213 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
 214 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
 215 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
 216 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1
2561 DISP.ALARM2
2562 DISP.ALARM3
2563 DISP.ALARM4
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
 217 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642 SET.GROUP3
2643 SET.GROUP4
2644 SET.GROUP5
2645 SET.GROUP6
2646 SET.GROUP7
2647 SET.GROUP8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1
2657 CON_TPMD2
2658 CON_TPMD3
2659 CON_TPMD4
2660 CON_TPMD5
 218 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2661 CON_TPMD6
2662 CON_TPMD7
2663 CON_TPMD8
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684 ARC_COM_RECV
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
 219 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
 220 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
 221 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
 222 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
 223 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 224 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
6. Disturbance record setting
Disturbance record default setting

Signal Model
Name Range Signal Name
Signal No. Signal Name 210 410
SIG1 0 - 3071 Signal name1 0 NA --
SIG9 0 - 3071 Signal name9 60 UV1-1 x
SIG12 0 - 3071 Signal name12 122 UV1 TRIP x
SIG13 0 - 3071 Signal name13 93 ZOV1 x
SIG14 0 - 3071 Signal name14 143 ZOV1 TRIP x
SIG16 0 - 3071 Signal name16 371 GEN.TRIP x
User setting of Virtual LED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IND1 [ ]
IND2 [ ]
 225 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 226 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
 227 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
DC power supply
Wiring
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit
Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit check
 228 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1
OV2
OV3
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZOV1
ZOV2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

OV1  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
OV2  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
UV1  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
UV2  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
ZOV1  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
ZOV2  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 229 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NOV1
NOV2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NOV1  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
NOV2  Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
4.3 Frequency elements test

Element Frequency setting Measured frequency
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
 230 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix I
Return Repair Form
 231 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION with the GRD130 to be
repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRD130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRD130 Model: 210D )
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1. Reason for returning the relay

 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the
attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 232 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / /
/ : : .
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Van: V
Vbn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
Vbc: V
Vca: V
Vph: V
V0: V
V1: V
V2: V
f: Hz
Fault values
Van: V
Vbn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
Vbc: V
Vca: V
Vph: V
V0: V
V1: V
V2: V
f: Hz
 233 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4. Describe the details of the incident:
5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/Dec/2002)
6. Give any comments about the GRD130, including the documents:
 234 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 235 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 236 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix J
Technical Data
 237 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC voltage Vn: 100V to 120 V
Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
DC auxiliary supply: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)
220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%
DC supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)
220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)
Overload Ratings
AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous
Burden
AC voltage inputs:  0.1VA (at rated voltage)
DC power supply:  10W (quiescent)
 15W (maximum)
Binary input circuit:  0.5W per input at 110Vdc
Overvoltage Protection
st nd
1 ,2 Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps
st
Delay type (1 threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127)
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
DO/PU ratio 10 – 98% in 1% steps
st
Reset Delay (1 threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection
st nd
1 ,2 Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
st
st
Undervoltage Block 5.0 – 20.0Vin 0.1V steps
Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (ZOV)
st nd
1 ,2 ZOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
st
st
Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (NOV)
st nd
1 ,2 NOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
st
st
 238 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Under/Over Frequency Protection

(Fnom  10.00Hz) – (Fnom  10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps
st th
1 - 4 under/overfrequency threshold
Fnom: nominal frequency
Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Voltage and Synchronizm Check
Synchronism check angle (θS) 5 to 75 in 1 steps
UV element (SYUV) 10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element (SYOV) 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Voltage difference check (ΔV) 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line dead check (VB) 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line live check (VL) 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Frequency difference check (Δf) 0.01 to 2.00Hz in 0.01 steps
Synchronism check time (TSYN) 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage check time 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Accuracy
Overvoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting  5%
Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting  5%
Inverse Time Delays:  5% or 30ms (1.5 to 30 times setting)
Definite Time Delays:  1% or 10ms
Front Communication port - local PC (RS232)
Connection: Point to point
Cable type: Multi-core (straight)
Cable length: 15m (max.)
Connector: RS232C 9-way D-type female
Rear Communication port - remote PC
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Connection Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type Twisted pair cable with shield
Cable length 1200m (max.)
Connection Screw terminals
Isolation 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2kbps
Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Cable type Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125μm fibre
Connector ST
Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2kbps
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100: 100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX: SC connector
Time synchronization port
IRIG Time Code IRIG-B122
Input impedance 4k-ohm
Input voltage range 4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Connection Screw type
 239 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 15Vdc (min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating
Binary Outputs
Number 8
Ratings: Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc
Durability: Loaded contact: 10000 operations
Unloaded contact: 100000 operations
Mechanical design
Weight 4.5kg
Case colour Munsell No. 10YR8/1
Installation Flush mounting
 240 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10C to +55C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-3 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all
terminals and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 / EN61000-4-12 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave
Electrostatic IEC60255-22-2 Class 4, 8kV contact discharge, 15kV air discharge.
Discharge IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1GHz and 1.4GHz to 4.0GHz. Additional spot tests at 80,
Disturbance 160, 380, 450, 900, 1860 and 2150MHz.
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 / 4kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns
Disturbance EN61000-4-4 2kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns applied to com ports (RS485, etc.)
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV
RS485 port: 1kV/ -
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7, IEC61000-4-16 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance / EN61000-4-16 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC60255-25 Class A, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
 241 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2 and
EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low
Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to
EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.
 242 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 243 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A B C Output
A
1 1 1 1
B & Output Other cases 0
C
A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A
A B C Output
B & Output
1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
 244 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
0 t
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY

Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON
Other cases 0
Switch Output
 Output ON 1
ON OFF 0
 245 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 246 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix L
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 247 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed
easily as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “¥IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help][Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.
Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station
Polling cycle: 150ms or more
Timeout time (time till re-sending the request frame to relay): 100ms or more
IEC103 master GR relay
Data request
Polling cycle: Response frame

150ms or more
Data request
Response frame
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
 248 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)
- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission
condition(Signal number), COT
- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),
COT, Type of measurand quantities
- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
measurand quantities
- Common setting
 Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
 FUN of System function
 Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC
supply of the relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test
mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages
normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
 249 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
3.2 List of Information

The followings are the default settings.
IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal No. OFF ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 215 -- -- --
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 215 -- -- --
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 215 -- -- --
5 Pow er On Relay pow er on. Not supported
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
16 Auto-recloser active Not supported
active, if impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available, this
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If
18 Protection active GI 1 1, 7, 12 215 1413 1 2
not, set to inactive.
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1409 -- 2
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control

20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 11 215 1241 1 2
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to
21 Test mode GI 1 11 215 1242 1 2
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
event is sent to control system.
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1243 1 2
27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set

Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision Not supported
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 7 215 1268 1 2
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 7 215 1269 1 2
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 7 215 1270 1 2
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group w arning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7 215 1258 1 2
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7 215 1252 1 2
Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault Not supported
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault Not supported
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault Not supported
51 Earth Fault Fw d Earth fault forw ard Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported
 250 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal NO. OFF ON
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 805 1 2
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 806 1 2
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 807 1 2
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 808 1 2
68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1, 7 215 371 -- 2
69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 372 -- 2
70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 373 -- 2
71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 374 -- 2
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location Not supported
74 Fault forw ard/line Forw ard fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
76 Teleprotection Signal transmitted Carrier signal sending Not supported
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 1279 1 2
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip Not supported
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip Not supported
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip Not supported
93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip Not supported
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported
 251 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
IEC103 configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents Type
GI COT FUN Max. No.
ID
Measurands
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0
145 Measurand I,V Vab <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 2
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Vab <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 4
147 Measurand IN,VEN Ve <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 2
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 215 9
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries of
241 Not supported
a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirm Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Note (2): depends on relay model as follows:

Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4
Model and [APPL] (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)
setting IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VEN
Model 210 0 0 Vph-ph 0 Vph-ph －－ 0 Ve
Model 410 0 0 Vab 0 Vab －－ 0 Ve
Type ID=9
Model and [APPL] (INF=148)
setting IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q f
Model 210 0 0 0 Vph-n 0 0 0 0 f
Model 410 0 0 0 Van Vbn Vcn 0 0 f
Above values are normalized by IECNF.
Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit Coeff
Lower Upper
145 Vab 1 24 long 0 4096 1.8618
146 Vab 1 24 long 0 4096 1.8618
147 Ve 1 144 long 0 4096 3.2252
148 Va 1 0 long 0 4096 3.2252
Vb 1 8 long 0 4096 3.2252
Vc 1 16 long 0 4096 3.2252
f 1 184 long 0 4096 0.68267
 252 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

INF Description Contents Control
Type ID COT FUN
direction
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction

System functions
0 Initiation of general interrogation -- 7 9 255
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported
17 Teleprotection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 215
18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 215
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 215
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 215
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry Not supported
Read values or attributes of a

244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of generic
245 Not supported
data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execution Not supported
(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, "IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

INF DCO
Sig off Sig on Rev Valid time
16 2684 2684 ✓ 0
17 2685 2685 ✓ 0
18 2686 2686 ✓ 0
19 0 2688 200
23 0 2640 1000
24 0 2641 1000
25 0 2642 1000
26 0 2643 1000
✓: signal reverse
 253 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Description Contents GRD140 supported Comment
Basic application functions

Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated value
Measurand
times
Current L1 Ia Configurable
Current L2 Ib Configurable
Current L3 Ic Configurable
Voltage L1-E Va Configurable
Voltage L2-E Vb Configurable
Voltage L3-E Vc Configurable
Active pow er P P Configurable
Reactive pow er Q Q Configurable
Frequency f f Configurable
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No set
Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Setting file’s remark: IGRD130DA001
- Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Measurand period [s]: 2
- Function type of System functions: 215
- Signal No. of Test mode: 1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279
 254 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
 255 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be
provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:
First draft: _01.csv
Second draft: _02.csv
Third draft: _03.csv
Revision number
The name “” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100
or GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte
characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.
(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data
The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy
disk) or CD-R, not to remain in the folder.
 256 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation
Object Procedure
1 Communication Address setting is incorrect. BCU Match address setting between BCU and relay.
trouble (IEC103 RY Avoid duplication of address with other relay.
communication is Transmission baud rate setting is BCU Match transmission baud rate setting between
not available.) incorrect. RY BCU and relay.
Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay
data that BCU transmits to relay is setting is fixed as following settings.
incorrect. - Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even
RS485 or optical cable Cable - Check the connection port.
interconnection is incorrect. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection of
optical cable.
The setting of converter is incorrect. Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW
(RS485/optic conversion is executed setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL
with the transmission channel, etc.) (6F2S0794).
The relationship between logical “0/1” BCU Check the following;
of the signal and Sig.on/off is Logical0 : Sig.on
incorrect. (In the event of using Logical1:Sig.off
optical cable)
Terminal resistor is not offered. cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both
(Especially when RS485 cable is ends of RS 485 cable.
long.)
Relay cannot receive the requirement BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms
frame from BCU. between receiving the reply frame from the relay
(The timing coordination of sending and transmitting the next requirement frame on
and receiving switch control is BCU.
irregular in half-duplex
communication.)
The requirement frame from BCU and BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the
the reply frame from relay contend. relay.
(The sending and receiving timing Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable value of
coordination is irregular in half-duplex response time 50ms plus margin)
communication.)
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending condition RY Change the event sending condition (signal
display IEC103 is not valid. number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a
event on the SAS setting error. When the setting is correct, check
side. the signal condition by programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Information RY Match the relevant event Information Number
Number (INF) and/or Function Type SAS (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay
(FUN) may be different between the and SAS.
relay and SAS.
The relay is not initialised after writing RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from
IEC103 configurator setting. the LCD screen. When differing from the sum
value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.
It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal.
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the frame of BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.
synchronised time synchronisation.
with IEC103 The settling of time synchronisation RY Change the settling of time synchronisation
communication. source is set to other than IEC. source to IEC.
(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay
 257 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
 258 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix M
IEC61850: MICS & PICS
 259 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
The GRD130 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following
tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes GRD130 Nodes GRD130
L: System Logical Nodes GGIO_GOOSE Yes
LPHD Yes GSAL ---
Common Logical Node Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
LLN0 Yes IARC ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions IHMI ---
PDIF --- ITCI ---
PDIR --- ITMI ---
PDIS --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDOP --- ANCR ---
PDUP --- ARCO ---
PFRC Yes ATCC ---
PHAR --- AVCO ---
PHIZ --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PIOC --- MDIF ---
PMRI --- MHAI ---
PMSS --- MHAN ---
POPE --- MMTR ---
PPAM --- MMXN ---
PSCH --- MMXU Yes
PSDE --- MSQI Yes
PTEF --- MSTA ---
PTOC --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOF Yes SARC ---
PTOV Yes SIMG ---
PTRC Yes SIML ---
PTTR --- SPDC ---
PTUC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUV Yes XCBR Yes
PUPF --- XSWI ---
PTUF Yes T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PVOC --- TCTR ---
PVPH --- TVTR ---
PZSU --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YEFN ---
RDRE --- YLTC ---
RADR --- YPSH ---
RBDR --- YPTR ---
RDRS --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system
RBRF --- equipment
RDIR --- ZAXN ---
RFLO --- ZBAT ---
RPSB --- ZCAB ---
RREC --- ZCAP ---
RSYN Yes ZCON ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZGEN ---
CALH --- ZGIL ---
CCGR --- ZLIN ---
CILO --- ZMOT ---
CPOW --- ZREA ---
CSWI --- ZRRC ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZSAR ---
GAPC --- ZTCF ---
GGIO Yes ZTCR ---
 260 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRD130
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACT_ABC Yes
ACD Yes
ACD_ABC Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV Yes
SAV ---
WYE Yes
WYE_ABCN Yes
DEL Yes
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC Yes
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
 261 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLN0 class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
 262 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PFRC class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOV class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
PTRC class
 263 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Data
Status Information
Tr ACT_ABC Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
PTUV class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
PTUF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
GGIO class
 264 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
 265 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GGIO_GOOSE class
Data
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
 266 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y
PhV WYE_ABCN Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A WYE_ABCN Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O N
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C N
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
 267 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
 268 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACT_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
 269 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
ACD_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
 270 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
 271 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
CMV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
 272 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 N
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
WYE_ABCN class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
 273 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
DEL class
Name
Data
phsAB CMV GC_1 Y
phsBC CMV GC_1 Y
phsCA CMV GC_1 Y
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B |C |… O N
Services
 274 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
 275 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
DPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | M Y
bad-state
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
Services
 276 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
 277 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
 278 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
 279 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PICS:
Client/ Server/ GRD130 Remarks
subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
M12-1 entryID
 280 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
M12-2 DataRefInc
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O N
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S27-3 data-update (dupd) N
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
 281 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O N
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
 282 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server GRD130 Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server GRD130 Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
 283 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR GRD
InitiateRequest
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range 130
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling m m m m Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initRequestDetail m m m m Y
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

InitiateRequest
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled m m m m Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initResponseDetail m m m m Y
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
 284 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
MMS service supported conformance table

MMS service supported CBB
status o o o m Y
getNameList o o o c1 Y
identify o o m m Y
rename o o o o N
read o o o c2 Y
write o o o c3 Y
getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y
defineNamedVariable o o o o N
defineScatteredAccess o i o i N
getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N
deleteVariableAccess o o o o N
defineNamedVariableList o o o o N
getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y
deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N
defineNamedType o i o i N
getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N
deleteNamedType o i o i N
input o i o i N
output o i o i N
takeControl o i o i N
relinquishControl o i o i N
defineSemaphore o i o i N
deleteSemaphore o i o i N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N
downloadSegment o i o i N
terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N
initiateUploadSequence o i o i N
uploadSegment o i o i N
terminateUploadSequence o i o i N
requestDomainDownload o i o i N
requestDomainUpload o i o i N
loadDomainContent o i o i N
storeDomainContent o i o i N
deleteDomain o i o i N
getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y
createProgramInvocation o i o i N
 285 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m N
cancel o o o m N
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N
 286 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
MMS Parameter CBB

MMS parameter CBB
STR1 o o o c1 Y
STR2 o o o o N
1 1 or 1 c2 Y(10)
gre
NEST ater
VNAM o o o c1 Y
VADR o o o o N
VALT o o o c1 Y
bit x x x x N
TPY o o o o N
VLIS o c1 o c3 Y
bit x x x x N
bit x x x x N
CEI o i o i N
ACO o c4 o c4 N
SEM o c4 o c4 N
CSR o c4 o c4 N
CSNC o c4 o c4 N
CSPLC o c4 o c4 N
CSPI o c4 o c4 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.
c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.
 287 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
GetNameList conformance statement

GetNameList
Request
ObjectClass m m m m Y
ObjectScope m m m m Y
DomainName o o m m Y
ContinueAfter o m m m Y
Response+
List Of Identifier m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y
Response-
Error Type m m m m Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.
AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.
VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

VariableAccessSpecification
listOfVariable o o o c1 Y
variableSpecification o o o c1 Y
alternateAccess o o o c1 Y
variableListName o o o c2 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.
VariableSpecification conformance statement

VariableSpecification
name o o o m Y
address o o o i N
variableDescription o o o i N
scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N
invalidated o x o x N
Read conformance statement

Read
Request
specificationWithResult o o o m Y
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
Response
variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y
 288 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Write conformance statement

Write
Request
listOfData m m m m Y
Response
failure m m m m Y
success m m m m Y
InformationReport conformance statement

InformationReport
Request
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y
GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

GetVariableAccessAttributes
Request
name o o m m Y
address o o m x N
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
address o x o x N
typeSpecification m m m m Y
DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

GetNamedVariableListAttributes
Request
ObjectName m m m m Y
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
listOfVariable m m m m Y
variableSpecification m m m m Y
alternateAccess o m o i N
DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
 289 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement

Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
FileDirectory conformance statement

FileDirectory
Request
filespecification o o m m Y
continueAfter o o m m Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y
FileOpen conformance statement

FileOpen
Request
filename m m m m Y
initialPosition o o m m Y
Response+
frsmID m m m m Y
fileAttributes m m m m Y
FileRead conformance statement

FileRead
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+
fileData m m m m Y
 290 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
FileClose conformance statement

FileClose
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+ m m m m Y
GOOSE conformance statement

Subscriber Publisher Value/comment GRD130
GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y
SendGOOSEMessage m m Y
GetGoReference o c3 N
GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N
GetGoCBValues o o Y
SetGoCBValues o o Y
GSENotSupported c2 c5 N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.
 291 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Appendix N
Ordering
 292 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Ordering
GRD130 D 0
Type:
Voltage Relay GRD130
Model:
-Model 210: Two pole 210
-Model 410: Four pole 410
Ratings:
50Hz, 110/125Vdc 1
60Hz, 110/125Vdc 2
50Hz, 220/250Vdc 5
60Hz, 220/250Vdc 6
50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc A
60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc B
50Hz, 24/30Vdc E
60Hz, 24/30Vdc F
Communications:
For IEC60870-5-103 For IEC61850 / RSM100
RS485 100BASE-TX A
RS485 100BASE-FX B
Fibre optic 100BASE-TX D
Fibre optic 100BASE-FX E
Miscellaneous:
None 0
 293 
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
0.0 Sep. 2, 2010 -- First issue
1.0 Sep. 6, 2010 2.1.1 Modified Figures 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5. (Signal No.)
2.1.2 Modified Figures 2.1.9, 2.1.10 and 2.1.11. (Signal No.)
2.1.3 Modified Figure 2.1.16 and 2.1.17. (Signal No.)
2.1.4 Modified Figure 2.1.19 and 2.1.20. (Signal No.)
6.5.1.1, 6.5.1.2 Modified Signal No.
Appendices Modified Appendix G.
1.1 Oct.27, 2011 1. Modified descriptions
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.3.6
1.2 Oct. 2, 2017 --- Republished under spin-off company
 294 

GRD130D 6F2S0904 1.2

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GRD130D 6F2S0904 1.2

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

Explanation of symbols used

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

Do not view directly with optical instruments.

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

4.1.1 Front Panel 53

6.7.4 Resumption of Service 125

Appendix A Signal List 127

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

GRD130 provides four independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves

Overvoltage Inverse Time

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

3() 53 & & t 0 103

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

3() 56 & & t 0 110

Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection

3() 59 & & t 0 117

Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection

3() 520 & & t 0 437

Figure 2.1.6 OV4 Overvoltage Protection

()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

Definite time reset

Undervoltage Inverse Time

Operating Time (secs)

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

1589 UV2_BLOCK 1 &

Figure 2.1.10 UV2 Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.11 UV3 Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.12 UV4 Undervoltage Protection

()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZOV

Definite time reset

Figure 2.1.16 ZOV1 Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.17 ZOV2 Overvoltage Protection

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

Operating Time (secs)

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NOV

Definite time reset

Figure 2.1.19 NOV1 Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.20 NOV2 Overvoltage Protection

2.2 Frequency Protection

2.2.1 Frequency element

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Element

Figure 2.2.2 Scheme Logic for Frequency Protection

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

Figure 2.2.3 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Figure 2.2.4 Scheme Logic of Frequency Rate-of-change Protection

2.2.3 Trip Circuit

FRQ1 TRIP 1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP

7-8 --- --- --- --- Ve or Vs () Ve or Vs ()